]> gcc.gnu.org Git - gcc.git/blame - gcc/cse.c
(add_to_sequence): Treat MATCH_PAR_DUP just like MATCH_DUP.
[gcc.git] / gcc / cse.c
CommitLineData
7afe21cc
RK
1/* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4This file is part of GNU CC.
5
6GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
7it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
8the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
9any later version.
10
11GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
12but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
13MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
14GNU General Public License for more details.
15
16You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
18the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
19
20
21#include "config.h"
22#include "rtl.h"
23#include "regs.h"
24#include "hard-reg-set.h"
25#include "flags.h"
26#include "real.h"
27#include "insn-config.h"
28#include "recog.h"
29
30#include <stdio.h>
31#include <setjmp.h>
32
33/* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
34 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
35 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
36 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
37
38 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
39 when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
40 known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
41 basic block separately. Note, however, that these are not quite
42 the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
43 data flow analysis and register packing. We do not need to start fresh
44 after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
45
46 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
47 a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
48 with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
49
50 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
51 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
52 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
53 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
54 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
55 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
56 information recorded on an expression other than a register
57 is to keep it in a hash table.
58
59Registers and "quantity numbers":
60
61 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
62 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
63 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
64 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
65 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
66 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
67 `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
68 of as containing.
69
70 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
71 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
72
73 Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
74 variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
75
76 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
77 quantity number. `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
78 `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
79
80 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
81 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
82 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
83
84 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
85 REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
86 registers and must be in the same class.
87
88 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
89 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
90 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
91 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
92
93Constants and quantity numbers
94
95 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
96 in the appropriate element of qty_const. This is in addition to
97 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
98
d45cf215 99 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
7afe21cc
RK
100 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
101 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
102
103 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
104 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
105 of qty_const.
106
107 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
108 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
109 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
110 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
111 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
112
113Other expressions:
114
115 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
116 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
117 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
118 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
119 hash codes.
120
121 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
122 currently have equivalent values.
123
124 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
125 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
126 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
127 number, not the register number.
128
129 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
130 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
131 could be different as a result.
132
133 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
134 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
135 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
136 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
137
138 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
139 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
140 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
141 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
142 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
143 All expressions that refer to non-constant
144 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
145
146 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
147 containing references to that register, and only those,
148 must be removed.
149
150 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
151 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
152 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
153 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
154 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
155 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
156 within any one basic block.
157
158 The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
159 reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
160 reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
161 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
162 when the references were entered. If we want to enter a reference
163 and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
164 Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
165 don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
166
167 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
168 the equivalent-register chains. However, the vectors `reg_tick'
169 and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
170 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
171 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
172 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
173 the register.
174
175 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
176 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
177 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
178
179Related expressions:
180
181 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
182 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
183 the table, the related expression with no constant term
184 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
185 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
186 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
187
188/* One plus largest register number used in this function. */
189
190static int max_reg;
191
192/* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
193 We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big. */
194
195static int max_qty;
196
197/* Next quantity number to be allocated.
198 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
199
200static int next_qty;
201
202/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register
203 in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity. */
204
205static int *qty_first_reg;
206static int *qty_last_reg;
207
208/* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity. */
209
210static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
211
212/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
213 quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
214 A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
215 can also be entered here. */
216
217static rtx *qty_const;
218
219/* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
220 recorded in `qty_const'. */
221
222static rtx *qty_const_insn;
223
224/* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
225 quantity and some constant or register has been passed. In that case, we
226 know the results of the comparison in case we see it again. These variables
227 record a comparison that is known to be true. */
228
229/* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
230 result involving this quantity. If none, it is UNKNOWN. */
231static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
232
233/* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
234 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, it is undefined.
235 If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero. */
236
237static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
238
239/* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
240 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, if it undefined.
241 If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1. */
242
243static int *qty_comparison_qty;
244
245#ifdef HAVE_cc0
246/* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
247 table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
248 its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
249
250 Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0. If it should
251 happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
252 assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
253 the constant should be interpreted. */
254
255static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
256static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
257#endif
258
259/* Previous actual insn. 0 if at first insn of basic block. */
260
261static rtx prev_insn;
262
263/* Insn being scanned. */
264
265static rtx this_insn;
266
267/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
268 of the register's current contents. */
269
270static int *reg_qty;
271
272/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
273 previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
274 value.
275
276 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
277
278 If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined. */
279
280static int *reg_next_eqv;
281static int *reg_prev_eqv;
282
283/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
284 that register has been altered in the current basic block. */
285
286static int *reg_tick;
287
288/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
289 rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
290 If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
291 existing in the hash table are invalid.
292 If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
293 entered in the table. */
294
295static int *reg_in_table;
296
297/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
298 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
299 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
300 expression in the table. */
301
302static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
303
304/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
305 by a CALL_INSN. */
306
307static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
308
309/* Two vectors of ints:
310 one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
311 for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
312 These are used to initialize various other vectors fast. */
313
314static int *all_minus_one;
315static int *consec_ints;
316
317/* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
318
319static int cse_basic_block_start;
320
321/* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
322
323static int cse_basic_block_end;
324
325/* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
d45cf215 326 The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
7afe21cc
RK
327 We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block. */
328
906c4e36 329static int *uid_cuid;
7afe21cc
RK
330
331/* Get the cuid of an insn. */
332
333#define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
334
335/* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
336 in such a way that jump optimization should be redone. */
337
338static int cse_jumps_altered;
339
340/* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
341 if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
342 subexpression. */
343
344static int do_not_record;
345
346/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
347 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
348
349static int hash_arg_in_memory;
350
351/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
352 if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure. */
353
354static int hash_arg_in_struct;
355
356/* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
357 each recording one expression's information.
358 That expression is in the `exp' field.
359
360 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
361 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
362
363 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
364 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
365 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
366 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
367 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
368 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
369
370 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
371 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
372 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
373 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
374 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
375 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
376
377 The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
378 involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
379
380 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
381 (that differ by adding an integer).
382 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
383 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
384 chain is not useful.
385
386 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
387
388 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
389 a fixed address).
390
391 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
392
393 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
394 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
395 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
396 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
397
398
399struct table_elt
400{
401 rtx exp;
402 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
403 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
404 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
405 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
406 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
407 struct table_elt *related_value;
408 int cost;
409 enum machine_mode mode;
410 char in_memory;
411 char in_struct;
412 char is_const;
413 char flag;
414};
415
416#define HASHBITS 16
417
418/* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
419 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
420 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
421#define NBUCKETS 31
422
423/* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
424 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
425
426#define HASH(X, M) \
427 (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
428 ? ((((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS) \
429 : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
430
431/* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
432 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
433 non-fixed hard regs.
434 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
435 but not if it is an overlapping register. */
436#ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
437#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
438 (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N]) \
439 && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
440#else
441#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
442 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])
443#endif
444
445/* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
446 hard registers are the cheapest with a cost of 0. Next come pseudos
447 with a cost of one and other hard registers with a cost of 2. Aside
448 from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
449
450#define COST(X) \
451 (GET_CODE (X) == REG \
452 ? (REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1 \
453 : (FIXED_REGNO_P (REGNO (X)) \
454 && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (X)) != NO_REGS) ? 0 \
455 : 2) \
e5f6a288 456 : rtx_cost (X, SET) * 2)
7afe21cc
RK
457
458/* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
459 into the `qty_...' variables. */
460
461#define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
462
463static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
464
465/* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
466 but currently removed from the table. */
467
468static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
469
470/* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function. */
471
472static int n_elements_made;
473
474/* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
475 for functions previously processed. */
476
477static int max_elements_made;
478
479/* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged
480 by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn. Zero if the
481 last insn was not a conditional jump. */
482
483static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
484
485/* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
486 symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
487 convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
488 the insn. */
489
490static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
491
492/* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
493 for a particular instruction. If all three bits are zero,
494 no memory refs need to be invalidated. Each bit is more powerful
495 than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
496 bits are also set.
497
498 Here is how the bits are set:
499 Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
500 writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
501 writing in a structure element at variable address
502 invalidates all but scalar variables,
503 and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything. */
504
505struct write_data
506{
507 int sp : 1; /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
508 int var : 1; /* Invalidate variable addresses. */
509 int nonscalar : 1; /* Invalidate all but scalar variables. */
510 int all : 1; /* Invalidate all memory refs. */
511};
512
513/* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
514 virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
515 by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
516
517#define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
518 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx \
519 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
520 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
521 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
522 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
523 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
524 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
525 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
526
6f90e075
JW
527/* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.
528
529 This used to include FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P, however, we can't assume that
530 arg_pointer_rtx by itself is nonzero, because on at least one machine,
531 the i960, the arg pointer is zero when it is unused. */
7afe21cc
RK
532
533#define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
6f90e075
JW
534 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx \
535 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
536 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
537 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
538 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
539 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
540 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
541 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)) \
7afe21cc
RK
542 || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx \
543 || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
544 || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx \
545 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
546 && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx \
547 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
548 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
549
550static struct table_elt *lookup ();
551static void free_element ();
552
553static int insert_regs ();
554static void rehash_using_reg ();
555static void remove_invalid_refs ();
556static int exp_equiv_p ();
557int refers_to_p ();
558int refers_to_mem_p ();
559static void invalidate_from_clobbers ();
560static int safe_hash ();
561static int canon_hash ();
562static rtx fold_rtx ();
563static rtx equiv_constant ();
564static void record_jump_cond ();
565static void note_mem_written ();
566static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p ();
567static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args ();
568static void cse_insn ();
569static void cse_set_around_loop ();
570\f
571/* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
572 One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
573 Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
574 Other uses like the latter are expected in the future. */
575
576/* Return the right cost to give to an operation
577 to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
578 N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction. */
579
580#define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
581
582int
e5f6a288 583rtx_cost (x, outer_code)
7afe21cc 584 rtx x;
e5f6a288 585 enum rtx_code outer_code;
7afe21cc
RK
586{
587 register int i, j;
588 register enum rtx_code code;
589 register char *fmt;
590 register int total;
591
592 if (x == 0)
593 return 0;
594
595 /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
596 Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults. */
597
598 code = GET_CODE (x);
599 switch (code)
600 {
601 case MULT:
602 /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
603 because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift. */
604 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
605 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
606 total = 2;
607 else
608 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
609 break;
610 case DIV:
611 case UDIV:
612 case MOD:
613 case UMOD:
614 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
615 break;
616 case USE:
617 /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker. */
618 total = 0;
619 break;
538b78e7
RS
620 case ASM_OPERANDS:
621 /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
622 we have no way of validating the resulting insn. So assign
623 anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost. */
624 total = 1000;
625 break;
7afe21cc
RK
626 default:
627 total = 2;
628 }
629
630 switch (code)
631 {
632 case REG:
633 return 1;
634 case SUBREG:
fc3ffe83
RK
635 /* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
636 the mode, the more expensive it is. */
637 if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
638 return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
639 + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
7afe21cc
RK
640 return 2;
641#ifdef RTX_COSTS
e5f6a288 642 RTX_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc 643#endif
e5f6a288 644 CONST_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc
RK
645 }
646
647 /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
648 which is already in total. */
649
650 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
651 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
652 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
e5f6a288 653 total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code);
7afe21cc
RK
654 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
655 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
e5f6a288 656 total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code);
7afe21cc
RK
657
658 return total;
659}
660\f
661/* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
662 for a new basic block. */
663
664static void
665new_basic_block ()
666{
667 register int i;
668
669 next_qty = max_reg;
670
671 bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
672
673 bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
674 bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
675 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
676
677 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
678 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
679
680 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
681 {
682 register struct table_elt *this, *next;
683 for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
684 {
685 next = this->next_same_hash;
686 free_element (this);
687 }
688 }
689
690 bzero (table, sizeof table);
691
692 prev_insn = 0;
693
694#ifdef HAVE_cc0
695 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
696#endif
697}
698
699/* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
700 and initialize that quantity. */
701
702static void
703make_new_qty (reg)
704 register int reg;
705{
706 register int q;
707
708 if (next_qty >= max_qty)
709 abort ();
710
711 q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
712 qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
713 qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
714 qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
715 qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
716
717 reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
718}
719
720/* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
721 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
722
723static void
724make_regs_eqv (new, old)
725 register int new, old;
726{
727 register int lastr, firstr;
728 register int q = reg_qty[old];
729
730 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
731 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
732 abort ();
733
734 reg_qty[new] = q;
735 firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
736 lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
737
738 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
739 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
740 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
741 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
742 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
743 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
744 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
830a38ee 745 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
7afe21cc
RK
746 either. */
747 && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
748 && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
749 || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
750 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
751 || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
752 || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
753 < cse_basic_block_start))
754 && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
755 > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
756 {
757 reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
758 reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
759 reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
760 qty_first_reg[q] = new;
761 }
762 else
763 {
764 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
765 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
766 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
767 equivalent for anything. */
768 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
769 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
770 && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
771 lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
772 reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
773 if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
774 reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
775 else
776 qty_last_reg[q] = new;
777 reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
778 reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
779 }
780}
781
782/* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
783
784static void
785delete_reg_equiv (reg)
786 register int reg;
787{
788 register int n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
789 register int p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
790 register int q = reg_qty[reg];
791
792 /* If invalid, do nothing. N and P above are undefined in that case. */
793 if (q == reg)
794 return;
795
796 if (n != -1)
797 reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
798 else
799 qty_last_reg[q] = p;
800 if (p != -1)
801 reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
802 else
803 qty_first_reg[q] = n;
804
805 reg_qty[reg] = reg;
806}
807
808/* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
809 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
810
811 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
812 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
813
814 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
815 is being stored in the table.
816
817 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
818 of X. */
819
820static int
821mention_regs (x)
822 rtx x;
823{
824 register enum rtx_code code;
825 register int i, j;
826 register char *fmt;
827 register int changed = 0;
828
829 if (x == 0)
e5f6a288 830 return 0;
7afe21cc
RK
831
832 code = GET_CODE (x);
833 if (code == REG)
834 {
835 register int regno = REGNO (x);
836 register int endregno
837 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
838 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
839 int i;
840
841 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
842 {
843 if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
844 remove_invalid_refs (i);
845
846 reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
847 }
848
849 return 0;
850 }
851
852 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
853 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
854 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
855 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
856
857 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
858 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
859 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
860 use of the register is in the comparison. */
861
862 if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
863 {
864 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
865 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
906c4e36 866 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
867 {
868 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
869 changed = 1;
870 }
871
872 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
873 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
906c4e36 874 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
875 {
876 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
877 changed = 1;
878 }
879 }
880
881 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
882 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
883 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
884 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
885 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
886 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
887 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
888
889 return changed;
890}
891
892/* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
893 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
894 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
895 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
896 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
897 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
898
899 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
900 so X's hash code may be different. */
901
902static int
903insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
904 rtx x;
905 struct table_elt *classp;
906 int modified;
907{
908 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
909 {
910 register int regno = REGNO (x);
911
912 if (modified
913 || ! (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
914 && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] == GET_MODE (x)))
915 {
916 if (classp)
917 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
918 classp != 0;
919 classp = classp->next_same_value)
920 if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
921 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
922 {
923 make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
924 return 1;
925 }
926
927 make_new_qty (regno);
928 qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
929 return 1;
930 }
931 }
c610adec
RK
932
933 /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
934 table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
935 this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
936 not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
937 a quantity number now. */
938
939 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
940 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
941 {
906c4e36 942 insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL_PTR, 0);
c610adec
RK
943 mention_regs (SUBREG_REG (x));
944 return 1;
945 }
7afe21cc
RK
946 else
947 return mention_regs (x);
948}
949\f
950/* Look in or update the hash table. */
951
952/* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements. */
953
954static void
955free_element (elt)
956 struct table_elt *elt;
957{
958 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
959 free_element_chain = elt;
960}
961
962/* Return an element that is free for use. */
963
964static struct table_elt *
965get_element ()
966{
967 struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
968 if (elt)
969 {
970 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
971 return elt;
972 }
973 n_elements_made++;
974 return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
975}
976
977/* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
978 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
979 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
980 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
981
982static void
983remove_from_table (elt, hash)
984 register struct table_elt *elt;
985 int hash;
986{
987 if (elt == 0)
988 return;
989
990 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
991 elt->first_same_value = 0;
992
993 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
994
995 {
996 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
997 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
998
999 if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
1000
1001 if (prev)
1002 prev->next_same_value = next;
1003 else
1004 {
1005 register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1006 while (next)
1007 {
1008 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1009 next = next->next_same_value;
1010 }
1011 }
1012 }
1013
1014 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1015
1016 {
1017 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1018 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1019
1020 if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1021
1022 if (prev)
1023 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1024 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1025 table[hash] = next;
1026 else
1027 {
1028 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1029 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1030 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1031 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1032 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1033 if (table[hash] == elt)
1034 table[hash] = next;
1035 }
1036 }
1037
1038 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1039
1040 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1041 {
1042 register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1043 while (p->related_value != elt)
1044 p = p->related_value;
1045 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1046 if (p->related_value == p)
1047 p->related_value = 0;
1048 }
1049
1050 free_element (elt);
1051}
1052
1053/* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1054 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1055
1056 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1057 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1058
1059 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1060 looks like X. */
1061
1062static struct table_elt *
1063lookup (x, hash, mode)
1064 rtx x;
1065 int hash;
1066 enum machine_mode mode;
1067{
1068 register struct table_elt *p;
1069
1070 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1071 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1072 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
1073 return p;
1074
1075 return 0;
1076}
1077
1078/* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1079 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1080
1081static struct table_elt *
1082lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
1083 rtx x;
1084 int hash;
1085 enum machine_mode mode;
1086{
1087 register struct table_elt *p;
1088
1089 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1090 {
1091 int regno = REGNO (x);
1092 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1093 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1094 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1095 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
1096 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1097 return p;
1098 }
1099 else
1100 {
1101 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1102 if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
1103 return p;
1104 }
1105
1106 return 0;
1107}
1108
1109/* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1110 If one is found, return that expression. */
1111
1112static rtx
1113lookup_as_function (x, code)
1114 rtx x;
1115 enum rtx_code code;
1116{
1117 register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
1118 GET_MODE (x));
1119 if (p == 0)
1120 return 0;
1121
1122 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1123 {
1124 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1125 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1126 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
1127 return p->exp;
1128 }
1129
1130 return 0;
1131}
1132
1133/* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
1134 and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
1135 (or 0 if a new class should be made).
1136 It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
1137 the order cheapest first.
1138
1139 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1140 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1141
1142 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1143 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1144 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1145 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
830a38ee 1146 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
7afe21cc
RK
1147
1148 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1149 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1150
1151 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1152 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1153 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1154
1155 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1156
1157#define CHEAPER(X,Y) ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
1158
1159static struct table_elt *
1160insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
1161 register rtx x;
1162 register struct table_elt *classp;
1163 int hash;
1164 enum machine_mode mode;
1165{
1166 register struct table_elt *elt;
1167
1168 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1169 something is wrong. */
1170 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
1171 abort ();
1172
1173 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1174 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1175 {
1176 int regno = REGNO (x);
1177 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1178 int i;
1179
1180 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1181 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1182 }
1183
1184
1185 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1186
1187 elt = get_element ();
1188 elt->exp = x;
1189 elt->cost = COST (x);
1190 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1191 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1192 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1193 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1194 elt->related_value = 0;
1195 elt->in_memory = 0;
1196 elt->mode = mode;
1197 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
1198 /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
1199 (and other const values). */
1200 || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
1201 && GET_CODE (x) == REG
1202 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1203 || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
1204
1205 if (table[hash])
1206 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1207 table[hash] = elt;
1208
1209 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1210 if (classp)
1211 {
1212 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1213 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1214 /* Insert at the head of the class */
1215 {
1216 register struct table_elt *p;
1217 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1218 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1219 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1220
1221 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1222 p->first_same_value = elt;
1223 }
1224 else
1225 {
1226 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1227 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1228 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1229 for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1230 p = next);
1231 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1232 elt->next_same_value = next;
1233 if (next)
1234 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1235 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1236 p->next_same_value = elt;
1237 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1238 }
1239 }
1240 else
1241 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1242
1243 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1244 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1245
1246 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1247 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1248 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1249 inserted).
1250
1251 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1252 constant, we must check the entire class.
1253
1254 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1255 update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1256 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1257
1258 if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
1259 {
1260 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
1261 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
1262 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
1263 }
1264
1265 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1266 {
1267 register struct table_elt *p;
1268
1269 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1270 {
1271 if (p->is_const)
1272 {
1273 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1274 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1275 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1276 break;
1277 }
1278 }
1279 }
1280
1281 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1282 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1283 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1284
1285 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1286 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1287 link it up with related expressions. */
1288 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1289 {
1290 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1291 int subhash;
1292 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1293
1294 if (subexp != 0)
1295 {
1296 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1297 subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
1298 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1299 if (subelt == 0)
906c4e36 1300 subelt = insert (subexp, NULL_PTR, subhash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
1301 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1302 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1303 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1304 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1305 subelt_prev = subelt;
1306 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1307 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1308 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1309 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1310 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1311 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1312 }
1313 }
1314
1315 return elt;
1316}
1317\f
1318/* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1319 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1320 the two classes equivalent.
1321
1322 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1323 call.
1324
1325 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1326
1327static void
1328merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
1329 struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
1330{
1331 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
1332
1333 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1334 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1335 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1336
1337 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1338 if (class1 == class2)
1339 return;
1340
1341 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1342 {
1343 int hash;
1344 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1345 enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1346
1347 next = elt->next_same_value;
1348
1349 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1350 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1351 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1352 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
1353 {
1354 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1355 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
1356 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1357
1358 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
1359 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1360
1361 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1362
1363 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
1364 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1365 new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1366 new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1367 new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1368 }
1369 }
1370}
1371\f
1372/* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
1373 all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
1374 X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
1375 (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
1376 all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
1377 so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1378
1379 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
1380 a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
1381 a numeric offset. */
1382
1383static void
1384invalidate (x)
1385 rtx x;
1386{
1387 register int i;
1388 register struct table_elt *p;
1389 register rtx base;
906c4e36 1390 register HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
7afe21cc
RK
1391
1392 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
1393 are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
1394 Just change the qty number of the register,
1395 mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1396 and remove it itself. */
1397
1398 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1399 {
1400 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1401 register int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1402
1403 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1404 that it's value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1405 entry from the hash table.
1406
1407 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1408 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1409 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1410 overlap these registers. */
1411
1412 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1413 reg_tick[regno]++;
1414
1415 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1416 remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
1417 else
1418 {
1419 int in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1420 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1421 int tregno, tendregno;
1422 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1423
1424 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1425
1426 for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
1427 {
1428 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1429 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1430 delete_reg_equiv (i);
1431 reg_tick[i]++;
1432 }
1433
1434 if (in_table)
1435 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1436 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1437 {
1438 next = p->next_same_hash;
1439
1440 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1441 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1442 continue;
1443
1444 tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1445 tendregno
1446 = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1447 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1448 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1449 }
1450 }
1451
1452 return;
1453 }
1454
1455 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1456 {
1457 if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
1458 abort ();
1459 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
1460 return;
1461 }
1462
1463 /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
1464 a nonvarying address. Remove all hash table elements
1465 that refer to overlapping pieces of memory. */
1466
1467 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1468 abort ();
1469 base = XEXP (x, 0);
1470 start = 0;
1471
1472 /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
1473 but the frame pointer register is also possible. */
1474 if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
1475 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
1476 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
1477 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
1478 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
1479 else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1480 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
1481 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
1482 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
1483 && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
1484 == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
1485 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
1486 {
1487 start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1488 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
1489 }
1490
1491 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
1492 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1493 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1494 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
1495 {
1496 start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1497 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1498 }
1499
1500 end = start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
1501 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1502 {
1503 register struct table_elt *next;
1504 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1505 {
1506 next = p->next_same_hash;
1507 if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
1508 remove_from_table (p, i);
1509 }
1510 }
1511}
1512
1513/* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1514 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1515 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1516 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1517
1518static void
1519remove_invalid_refs (regno)
1520 int regno;
1521{
1522 register int i;
1523 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1524
1525 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1526 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1527 {
1528 next = p->next_same_hash;
1529 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
906c4e36 1530 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, NULL_PTR))
7afe21cc
RK
1531 remove_from_table (p, i);
1532 }
1533}
1534\f
1535/* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
1536 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
1537
1538 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
1539
1540static void
1541rehash_using_reg (x)
1542 rtx x;
1543{
1544 int i;
1545 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1546 int hash;
1547
1548 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1549 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
1550
1551 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
1552 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
1553
1554 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
1555 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
1556 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
1557 return;
1558
1559 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
1560 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. We can skip
1561 objects that are registers, since they are handled specially. */
1562
1563 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1564 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1565 {
1566 next = p->next_same_hash;
1567 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
538b78e7 1568 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
7afe21cc
RK
1569 && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
1570 {
1571 if (p->next_same_hash)
1572 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
1573
1574 if (p->prev_same_hash)
1575 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
1576 else
1577 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
1578
1579 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1580 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
1581 if (table[hash])
1582 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
1583 table[hash] = p;
1584 }
1585 }
1586}
1587\f
1588/* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
1589 or some of them as specified by *WRITES. */
1590
1591static void
1592invalidate_memory (writes)
1593 struct write_data *writes;
1594{
1595 register int i;
1596 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1597 int all = writes->all;
1598 int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
1599
1600 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1601 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1602 {
1603 next = p->next_same_hash;
1604 if (p->in_memory
1605 && (all
1606 || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
1607 || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
1608 remove_from_table (p, i);
1609 }
1610}
1611\f
1612/* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
1613 register. Also update their TICK values. */
1614
1615static void
1616invalidate_for_call ()
1617{
1618 int regno, endregno;
1619 int i;
1620 int hash;
1621 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1622 int in_table = 0;
1623
1624 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
1625 a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
1626 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
1627 in the table. */
1628
1629 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
1630 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
1631 {
1632 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1633 if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
1634 reg_tick[regno]++;
1635
1636 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1637 }
1638
1639 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
1640 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
1641 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
1642
1643 if (in_table)
1644 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1645 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1646 {
1647 next = p->next_same_hash;
1648
1649 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1650 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1651 continue;
1652
1653 regno = REGNO (p->exp);
1654 endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1655
1656 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1657 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
1658 {
1659 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1660 break;
1661 }
1662 }
1663}
1664\f
1665/* Given an expression X of type CONST,
1666 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
1667 is not in the hash table),
1668 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
1669 If none can be found, return 0. */
1670
1671static rtx
1672use_related_value (x, elt)
1673 rtx x;
1674 struct table_elt *elt;
1675{
1676 register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
1677 register struct table_elt *p, *q;
906c4e36 1678 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
7afe21cc
RK
1679
1680 /* First, is there anything related known?
1681 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
1682 Otherwise, must look it up. */
1683
1684 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
1685 relt = elt;
1686 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1687 {
1688 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1689 if (subexp != 0)
1690 relt = lookup (subexp,
1691 safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
1692 GET_MODE (subexp));
1693 }
1694
1695 if (relt == 0)
1696 return 0;
1697
1698 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
1699 equivalent register. */
1700
1701 p = relt;
1702 while (1)
1703 {
1704 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
1705 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
1706 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
1707 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
1708 value.
1709
1710 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
1711 the same value as X. */
1712
1713 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
1714 q = 0;
1715 else
1716 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
1717 if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
1718 break;
1719
1720 if (q)
1721 break;
1722
1723 p = p->related_value;
1724
1725 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
1726 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
1727 and it has no related values recorded. */
1728 if (p == relt || p == 0)
1729 break;
1730 }
1731
1732 if (q == 0)
1733 return 0;
1734
1735 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
1736 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
1737 return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
1738}
1739\f
1740/* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
1741 Equivalent registers hash identically.
1742 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
1743 otherwise the mode of X is used.
1744
1745 Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
1746
1747 Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
1748 which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
1749 In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
1750 if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
1751
1752 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
1753 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
1754
1755static int
1756canon_hash (x, mode)
1757 rtx x;
1758 enum machine_mode mode;
1759{
1760 register int i, j;
1761 register int hash = 0;
1762 register enum rtx_code code;
1763 register char *fmt;
1764
1765 /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration. */
1766 repeat:
1767 if (x == 0)
1768 return hash;
1769
1770 code = GET_CODE (x);
1771 switch (code)
1772 {
1773 case REG:
1774 {
1775 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1776
1777 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
1778 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
1779 consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
1780 On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
1781
1782 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1783 && (global_regs[regno]
1784#ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1785 || (! fixed_regs[regno]
1786 && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1787 && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1788 && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
1789#endif
1790 ))
1791 {
1792 do_not_record = 1;
1793 return 0;
1794 }
1795 return hash + ((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[regno];
1796 }
1797
1798 case CONST_INT:
1799 hash += ((int) mode + ((int) CONST_INT << 7)
1800 + INTVAL (x) + (INTVAL (x) >> HASHBITS));
1801 return ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & hash;
1802
1803 case CONST_DOUBLE:
1804 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
1805 the integers representing the constant. */
1806 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1807 {
1808 int i;
1809 for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
1810 {
1811 int tem = XINT (x, i);
1812 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1813 }
1814 }
1815 return hash;
1816
1817 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
1818 case LABEL_REF:
1819 /* Use `and' to ensure a positive number. */
c4fd10e7
RK
1820 return (hash + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) LABEL_REF << 7)
1821 + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
7afe21cc
RK
1822
1823 case SYMBOL_REF:
c4fd10e7
RK
1824 return (hash + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) SYMBOL_REF << 7)
1825 + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
7afe21cc
RK
1826
1827 case MEM:
1828 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1829 {
1830 do_not_record = 1;
1831 return 0;
1832 }
1833 if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
1834 {
1835 hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
1836 if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
1837 }
1838 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
1839 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
1840 hash += (int) MEM;
1841 x = XEXP (x, 0);
1842 goto repeat;
1843
1844 case PRE_DEC:
1845 case PRE_INC:
1846 case POST_DEC:
1847 case POST_INC:
1848 case PC:
1849 case CC0:
1850 case CALL:
1851 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
1852 do_not_record = 1;
1853 return 0;
1854
1855 case ASM_OPERANDS:
1856 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1857 {
1858 do_not_record = 1;
1859 return 0;
1860 }
1861 }
1862
1863 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
1864 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1865 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1866 for (; i >= 0; i--)
1867 {
1868 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1869 {
1870 rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
1871 rtx tem1;
1872
1873 /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
1874 as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
1875 that way. */
1876 if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
1877 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
1878 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
1879 && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
1880 && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
1881 tem = tem1;
1882
1883 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
1884 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
1885 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
1886 if (i == 0)
1887 {
1888 x = tem;
1889 goto repeat;
1890 }
1891 hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
1892 }
1893 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1894 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1895 hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
1896 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
1897 {
1898 register char *p = XSTR (x, i);
1899 if (p)
1900 while (*p)
1901 {
1902 register int tem = *p++;
1903 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1904 }
1905 }
1906 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
1907 {
1908 register int tem = XINT (x, i);
1909 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1910 }
1911 else
1912 abort ();
1913 }
1914 return hash;
1915}
1916
1917/* Like canon_hash but with no side effects. */
1918
1919static int
1920safe_hash (x, mode)
1921 rtx x;
1922 enum machine_mode mode;
1923{
1924 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
1925 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1926 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1927 int hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
1928 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
1929 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
1930 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
1931 return hash;
1932}
1933\f
1934/* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
1935 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
1936 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
1937 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
1938 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
1939 in Y for being marked as valid.
1940
1941 If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
1942 that is known to be in the register. Ordinarily, we don't allow them
1943 to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
1944 in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
1945 for a given value. A possible equivalent that has different structure
1946 has its hash code computed from different data. Whether the hash code
1947 is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck. */
1948
1949static int
1950exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
1951 rtx x, y;
1952 int validate;
1953 int equal_values;
1954{
906c4e36 1955 register int i, j;
7afe21cc
RK
1956 register enum rtx_code code;
1957 register char *fmt;
1958
1959 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
1960 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
1961 if (x == y && !validate)
1962 return 1;
1963 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
1964 return x == y;
1965
1966 code = GET_CODE (x);
1967 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
1968 {
1969 if (!equal_values)
1970 return 0;
1971
1972 /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
1973 equivalent. We only have to validate if Y is a register. */
1974 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
1975 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
1976 && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
1977 && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
1978 && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
1979 return 1;
1980
1981 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
1982 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
1983 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1984 && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
1985 return 1;
1986
1987 return 0;
1988 }
1989
1990 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
1991 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
1992 return 0;
1993
1994 switch (code)
1995 {
1996 case PC:
1997 case CC0:
1998 return x == y;
1999
2000 case CONST_INT:
58c8c593 2001 return INTVAL (x) == INTVAL (y);
7afe21cc
RK
2002
2003 case LABEL_REF:
2004 case SYMBOL_REF:
2005 return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2006
2007 case REG:
2008 {
2009 int regno = REGNO (y);
2010 int endregno
2011 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
2012 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
2013 int i;
2014
2015 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2016 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2017 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2018
2019 if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
2020 return 0;
2021
2022 if (! validate)
2023 return 1;
2024
2025 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2026 if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
2027 return 0;
2028
2029 return 1;
2030 }
2031
2032 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2033 case PLUS:
2034 case MULT:
2035 case AND:
2036 case IOR:
2037 case XOR:
2038 case NE:
2039 case EQ:
2040 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
2041 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2042 validate, equal_values))
2043 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2044 validate, equal_values)
2045 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2046 validate, equal_values)));
2047 }
2048
2049 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2050 fail to match, return 0 for the whole things. */
2051
2052 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2053 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2054 {
906c4e36 2055 switch (fmt[i])
7afe21cc 2056 {
906c4e36 2057 case 'e':
7afe21cc
RK
2058 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
2059 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2060 break;
2061
2062 case 'E':
7afe21cc
RK
2063 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2064 return 0;
2065 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2066 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2067 validate, equal_values))
2068 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2069 break;
2070
2071 case 's':
7afe21cc
RK
2072 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2073 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2074 break;
2075
2076 case 'i':
7afe21cc
RK
2077 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2078 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2079 break;
2080
2081 case 'w':
2082 if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2083 return 0;
2084 break;
2085
2086 case '0':
2087 break;
2088
2089 default:
2090 abort ();
7afe21cc 2091 }
906c4e36
RK
2092 }
2093
7afe21cc
RK
2094 return 1;
2095}
2096\f
2097/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
2098 Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
2099 for being in the hash table. */
2100
2101int
2102refers_to_p (x, y)
2103 rtx x, y;
2104{
2105 register int i;
2106 register enum rtx_code code;
2107 register char *fmt;
2108
2109 repeat:
2110 if (x == y)
2111 return 1;
2112 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2113 return 0;
2114
2115 code = GET_CODE (x);
2116 /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
2117 If so, return 1. */
2118 if (code == GET_CODE (y))
2119 {
2120 if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
2121 return 1;
2122 }
2123
2124 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2125
2126 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2127 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2128 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2129 {
2130 if (i == 0)
2131 {
2132 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2133 goto repeat;
2134 }
2135 else
2136 if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
2137 return 1;
2138 }
2139 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2140 {
2141 int j;
2142 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2143 if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
2144 return 1;
2145 }
2146
2147 return 0;
2148}
2149\f
2150/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
2151 at an address of BASE plus some offset
2152 such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
2153 and END (exclusive).
2154
2155 The value is undefined if X is a varying address.
2156 This function is not used in such cases.
2157
2158 When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
2159 to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
2160 as if it were that constant value.
2161 In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done. */
2162
2163int
2164refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
2165 rtx x, base;
906c4e36 2166 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
7afe21cc 2167{
906c4e36 2168 register HOST_WIDE_INT i;
7afe21cc
RK
2169 register enum rtx_code code;
2170 register char *fmt;
2171
2172 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
2173 {
2174 start += INTVAL (base);
2175 end += INTVAL (base);
2176 base = const0_rtx;
2177 }
2178
2179 repeat:
2180 if (x == 0)
2181 return 0;
2182
2183 code = GET_CODE (x);
2184 if (code == MEM)
2185 {
2186 register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address. */
2187 int myend;
2188
2189 i = 0;
2190 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2191 /* qty_const is 0 when outside the cse pass;
2192 at such times, this info is not available. */
2193 && qty_const != 0
2194 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
2195 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
2196 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
2197 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
2198 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2199 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2200 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2201 && qty_const != 0
2202 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)))
2203 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (addr, 0))
2204 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2205 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2206 {
2207 i = INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2208 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]];
2209 }
2210
2211 check_addr:
2212 if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
2213 addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
2214
2215 /* If ADDR is BASE, or BASE plus an integer, put
2216 the integer in I. */
2217 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2218 && XEXP (addr, 0) == base
2219 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2220 i += INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2221 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
2222 {
2223 if (GET_CODE (base) != LO_SUM)
2224 return 1;
2225 /* The REG component of the LO_SUM is known by the
2226 const value in the XEXP part. */
2227 addr = XEXP (addr, 1);
2228 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2229 i = 0;
2230 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2231 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2232 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2233 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2234 {
906c4e36 2235 HOST_WIDE_INT tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
7afe21cc
RK
2236 start += tem;
2237 end += tem;
2238 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2239 }
2240 goto check_addr;
2241 }
2242 else if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
2243 {
2244 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2245 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2246 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2247 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2248 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2249 {
906c4e36 2250 HOST_WIDE_INT tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
7afe21cc
RK
2251 start += tem;
2252 end += tem;
2253 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2254 }
2255 goto check_addr;
2256 }
2257 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && base == const0_rtx)
2258 i = INTVAL (addr);
2259 else if (addr != base)
2260 return 0;
2261
2262 myend = i + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2263 return myend > start && i < end;
2264 }
2265
2266 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2267
2268 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2269 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2270 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2271 {
2272 if (i == 0)
2273 {
2274 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2275 goto repeat;
2276 }
2277 else
2278 if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
2279 return 1;
2280 }
2281 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2282 {
2283 int j;
2284 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2285 if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
2286 return 1;
2287 }
2288
2289 return 0;
2290}
2291
2292/* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
2293 except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
2294 isn't considered variable. */
2295
2296static int
2297cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
2298 rtx x;
2299{
2300 /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
2301 mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
2302 doesn't vary in any mode. */
2303
2304 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2305 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
2306 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
2307 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
2308 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
2309 return 0;
2310
2311 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2312 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2313 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2314 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
2315 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
2316 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
2317 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2318 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2319 return 0;
2320
2321 return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
2322}
2323\f
2324/* Canonicalize an expression:
2325 replace each register reference inside it
2326 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2327
2328 If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
2329 or vice versa, verify that INSN remains valid after we make our
2330 substitution. */
2331
2332static rtx
2333canon_reg (x, insn)
2334 rtx x;
2335 rtx insn;
2336{
2337 register int i;
2338 register enum rtx_code code;
2339 register char *fmt;
2340
2341 if (x == 0)
2342 return x;
2343
2344 code = GET_CODE (x);
2345 switch (code)
2346 {
2347 case PC:
2348 case CC0:
2349 case CONST:
2350 case CONST_INT:
2351 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2352 case SYMBOL_REF:
2353 case LABEL_REF:
2354 case ADDR_VEC:
2355 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2356 return x;
2357
2358 case REG:
2359 {
2360 register int first;
2361
2362 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2363 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2364 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2365 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2366 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2367 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2368 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2369 return x;
2370
2371 first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
2372 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2373 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2374 : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
2375 }
2376 }
2377
2378 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2379 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2380 {
2381 register int j;
2382
2383 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2384 {
2385 rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
2386
2387 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
178c39f6 2388 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
7afe21cc 2389 if (new && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
178c39f6
RK
2390 && (((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2391 != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2392 || (insn != 0 && insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)))
77fa0940 2393 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
2394 else
2395 XEXP (x, i) = new;
2396 }
2397 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2398 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2399 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2400 }
2401
2402 return x;
2403}
2404\f
2405/* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
2406 a MEM). Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
2407 insn.
2408
2409 On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
2410 is a good approximation for that cost. However, most RISC machines have
2411 only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats. If an address is
2412 valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address. Hence, for
2413 RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
2414 costs of various addresses. For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
2415 with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
2416 the most insns. For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
2417 class. Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
2418 than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
2419 */
2420
2421void
2422find_best_addr (insn, loc)
2423 rtx insn;
2424 rtx *loc;
2425{
2426 struct table_elt *elt, *p;
2427 rtx addr = *loc;
2428 int our_cost;
2429 int found_better = 1;
2430 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2431 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2432 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2433 int hash_code;
2434 int addr_volatile;
2435 int regno;
2436
2437 /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
2438 argument slots. These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
2439 in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
2440 output. It is not safe to clobber them.
2441
2442 There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
2443 for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
2444 no easy way to unshare the MEM. In addition, looking up all stack
2445 addresses is costly. */
2446 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2447 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2448 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2449 && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
2450 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2451 || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2452 && (regno = REGNO (addr),
2453 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2454 || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
2455 return;
2456
2457 /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it. This will
2458 sometimes simplify the expression. Many simplifications
2459 will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
2460 be valid and produce better code. */
2461 if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
2462 && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
2463 addr = *loc;
2464
42495ca0
RK
2465 /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't look for equivalences
2466 of the whole address. Also, ignore if volatile. */
2467
7afe21cc
RK
2468 do_not_record = 0;
2469 hash_code = HASH (addr, Pmode);
2470 addr_volatile = do_not_record;
2471 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2472 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2473 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2474
2475 if (addr_volatile)
2476 return;
2477
2478 elt = lookup (addr, hash_code, Pmode);
2479
7afe21cc 2480#ifndef ADDRESS_COST
42495ca0
RK
2481 if (elt)
2482 {
2483 our_cost = elt->cost;
2484
2485 /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works. */
2486 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
2487 if (elt->cost < our_cost
2488 && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG
2489 || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
2490 && validate_change (insn, loc,
906c4e36 2491 canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), NULL_RTX), 0))
42495ca0
RK
2492 return;
2493 }
2494#else
7afe21cc 2495
42495ca0
RK
2496 if (elt)
2497 {
2498 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2499 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2500 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2501 one that hasn't already been tried. */
7afe21cc 2502
42495ca0
RK
2503 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2504 p->flag = 0;
7afe21cc 2505
42495ca0
RK
2506 while (found_better)
2507 {
2508 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2509 int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
2510 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2511
2512 found_better = 0;
2513 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2514 if (! p->flag
2515 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2516 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2517 && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
2518 || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
2519 && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2520 {
2521 found_better = 1;
2522 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
2523 best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
2524 best_elt = p;
2525 }
7afe21cc 2526
42495ca0
RK
2527 if (found_better)
2528 {
2529 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
906c4e36
RK
2530 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp),
2531 NULL_RTX), 0))
42495ca0
RK
2532 return;
2533 else
2534 best_elt->flag = 1;
2535 }
2536 }
2537 }
7afe21cc 2538
42495ca0
RK
2539 /* If the address is a binary operation with the first operand a register
2540 and the second a constant, do the same as above, but looking for
2541 equivalences of the register. Then try to simplify before checking for
2542 the best address to use. This catches a few cases: First is when we
2543 have REG+const and the register is another REG+const. We can often merge
2544 the constants and eliminate one insn and one register. It may also be
2545 that a machine has a cheap REG+REG+const. Finally, this improves the
2546 code on the Alpha for unaligned byte stores. */
2547
2548 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
2549 && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == '2'
2550 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == 'c')
2551 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 0)) == REG
2552 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 1)) == CONST_INT)
7afe21cc 2553 {
42495ca0
RK
2554 rtx c = XEXP (*loc, 1);
2555
2556 do_not_record = 0;
2557 hash_code = HASH (XEXP (*loc, 0), Pmode);
2558 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2559 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2560 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2561
2562 elt = lookup (XEXP (*loc, 0), hash_code, Pmode);
2563 if (elt == 0)
2564 return;
2565
2566 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2567 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2568 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2569 one that hasn't already been tried. */
7afe21cc 2570
7afe21cc 2571 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
42495ca0 2572 p->flag = 0;
7afe21cc 2573
42495ca0 2574 while (found_better)
7afe21cc 2575 {
42495ca0
RK
2576 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2577 int best_rtx_cost = (COST (*loc) + 1) >> 1;
2578 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2579 rtx best_rtx = *loc;
2580
2581 found_better = 0;
2582 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2583 if (! p->flag
2584 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2585 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)))
2586 {
2587 rtx new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (*loc), Pmode,
2588 p->exp, c);
2589
2590 if (new == 0)
2591 new = gen_rtx (GET_CODE (*loc), Pmode, p->exp, c);
2592
2593 if ((ADDRESS_COST (new) < best_addr_cost
2594 || (ADDRESS_COST (new) == best_addr_cost
2595 && (COST (new) + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2596 {
2597 found_better = 1;
2598 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (new);
2599 best_rtx_cost = (COST (new) + 1) >> 1;
2600 best_elt = p;
2601 best_rtx = new;
2602 }
2603 }
2604
2605 if (found_better)
2606 {
2607 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
906c4e36
RK
2608 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_rtx),
2609 NULL_RTX), 0))
42495ca0
RK
2610 return;
2611 else
2612 best_elt->flag = 1;
2613 }
7afe21cc
RK
2614 }
2615 }
2616#endif
2617}
2618\f
2619/* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2620 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2621 what values are being compared.
2622
2623 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2624 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2625 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2626 compared to produce cc0.
2627
2628 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2629 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2630
2631static enum rtx_code
2632find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2)
2633 enum rtx_code code;
2634 rtx *parg1, *parg2;
2635{
2636 rtx arg1, arg2;
2637
2638 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2639
2640 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2641
2642 while (arg2 == const0_rtx)
2643 {
2644 /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest. */
2645 rtx x = 0;
2646 int reverse_code = 0;
2647 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2648
2649 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2650 On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2651 fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2652 when given CC0. */
2653
2654 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2655 x = arg1;
2656
2657 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2658 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2659
2660 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
2661 {
c610adec
RK
2662 if (code == NE
2663 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2664 && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2665#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2666 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2667 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2668#endif
2669 )
7afe21cc 2670 x = arg1;
c610adec
RK
2671 else if (code == EQ
2672 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2673 && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2674#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2675 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2676 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2677#endif
2678 )
7afe21cc
RK
2679 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2680 }
2681
2682 /* ??? We could also check for
2683
2684 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2685
2686 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2687
2688 if (x == 0)
2689 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2690 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2691 p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
2692 GET_MODE (arg1));
2693 if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
2694
2695 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2696 {
2697 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2698
2699 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
2700 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2701 continue;
2702
2703 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
2704 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
2705 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
2706 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
2707 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
2708 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
2709 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
2710 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
2711 || ((code == NE
2712 || (code == LT
c610adec 2713 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
906c4e36
RK
2714 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2715 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 2716 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
906c4e36
RK
2717 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2718 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
c610adec
RK
2719#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2720 || (code == LT
2721 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2722 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2723#endif
2724 )
7afe21cc
RK
2725 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
2726 {
2727 x = p->exp;
2728 break;
2729 }
2730 else if ((code == EQ
2731 || (code == GE
c610adec 2732 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
906c4e36
RK
2733 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2734 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 2735 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
906c4e36
RK
2736 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2737 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
c610adec
RK
2738#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2739 || (code == GE
2740 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2741 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2742#endif
2743 )
7afe21cc
RK
2744 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
2745 {
2746 reverse_code = 1;
2747 x = p->exp;
2748 break;
2749 }
2750
2751 /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
2752 it may let us predict the value of the comparison. */
2753 else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
2754 {
2755 arg1 = p->exp;
2756 continue;
2757 }
2758 }
2759
2760 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
2761 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
2762 if (x == 0)
2763 break;
2764
2765 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
2766 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
2767 code = GET_CODE (x);
2768
2769 if (reverse_code)
2770 code = reverse_condition (code);
2771 }
2772
2773 /* Return our results. */
2774 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
2775
2776 return code;
2777}
2778\f
2779/* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
2780 MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
2781 Return zero if no simplification can be made. */
2782
2783rtx
2784simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
2785 enum rtx_code code;
2786 enum machine_mode mode;
2787 rtx op;
2788 enum machine_mode op_mode;
2789{
2790 register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
2791
2792 /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
2793 check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
2794 such as FIX. At some point, this should be simplified. */
2795
2796#if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2797 if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2798 {
2799 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2800
2801#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2802 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
2803#else
2804 d = (double) INTVAL (op);
2805#endif
2806 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2807 }
2808 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2809 {
2810 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2811
2812#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2813 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
2814#else
2815 d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
2816#endif
2817 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2818 }
2819
2820 else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2821 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2822 {
2823 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2824
2825#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2826 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2827#else
2828 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
2829 {
2830 d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
906c4e36
RK
2831 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2832 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2833 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
7afe21cc
RK
2834 d = (- d - 1.0);
2835 }
2836 else
2837 {
2838 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
906c4e36
RK
2839 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2840 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2841 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
7afe21cc
RK
2842 }
2843#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2844 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2845 }
2846 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2847 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2848 {
2849 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2850
2851#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2852 REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
2853 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2854#else
2855 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
906c4e36
RK
2856 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2857 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2858 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
7afe21cc
RK
2859#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2860 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2861 }
2862#endif
2863
f89e32e9
RK
2864 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
2865 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
7afe21cc 2866 {
906c4e36
RK
2867 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0 = INTVAL (op);
2868 register HOST_WIDE_INT val;
7afe21cc
RK
2869
2870 switch (code)
2871 {
2872 case NOT:
2873 val = ~ arg0;
2874 break;
2875
2876 case NEG:
2877 val = - arg0;
2878 break;
2879
2880 case ABS:
2881 val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
2882 break;
2883
2884 case FFS:
2885 /* Don't use ffs here. Instead, get low order bit and then its
2886 number. If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired. */
2887 arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
2888 val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
2889 break;
2890
2891 case TRUNCATE:
2892 val = arg0;
2893 break;
2894
2895 case ZERO_EXTEND:
2896 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2897 op_mode = mode;
82a5e898 2898 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
d80e9fd7
RS
2899 {
2900 /* If we were really extending the mode,
2901 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
2902 and sign-extension. */
2903 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
2904 abort ();
2905 val = arg0;
2906 }
82a5e898
CH
2907 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2908 val = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
7afe21cc
RK
2909 else
2910 return 0;
2911 break;
2912
2913 case SIGN_EXTEND:
2914 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2915 op_mode = mode;
82a5e898 2916 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
d80e9fd7
RS
2917 {
2918 /* If we were really extending the mode,
2919 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
2920 and sign-extension. */
2921 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
2922 abort ();
2923 val = arg0;
2924 }
7afe21cc
RK
2925 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2926 {
82a5e898
CH
2927 val
2928 = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2929 if (val
2930 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
2931 val -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
7afe21cc
RK
2932 }
2933 else
2934 return 0;
2935 break;
2936
d45cf215
RS
2937 case SQRT:
2938 return 0;
2939
7afe21cc
RK
2940 default:
2941 abort ();
2942 }
2943
2944 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
2945 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
2946 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
2947 unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
2948 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
2949 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
2950 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
7afe21cc
RK
2951 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
2952
906c4e36 2953 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
2954 }
2955
2956 /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs. Also allow
2957 for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
2958 else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
2959 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
2960 {
906c4e36 2961 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, h1, lv, hv;
7afe21cc
RK
2962
2963 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
2964 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2965 else
2966 l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
2967
2968 switch (code)
2969 {
2970 case NOT:
2971 lv = ~ l1;
2972 hv = ~ h1;
2973 break;
2974
2975 case NEG:
2976 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2977 break;
2978
2979 case ABS:
2980 if (h1 < 0)
2981 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2982 else
2983 lv = l1, hv = h1;
2984 break;
2985
2986 case FFS:
2987 hv = 0;
2988 if (l1 == 0)
906c4e36 2989 lv = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
7afe21cc
RK
2990 else
2991 lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
2992 break;
2993
2994 case TRUNCATE:
906c4e36
RK
2995 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2996 return GEN_INT (l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
7afe21cc
RK
2997 else
2998 return 0;
2999 break;
3000
f72aed24
RS
3001 case ZERO_EXTEND:
3002 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
906c4e36 3003 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
f72aed24
RS
3004 return 0;
3005
3006 hv = 0;
3007 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
3008 break;
3009
3010 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3011 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
906c4e36 3012 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
f72aed24
RS
3013 return 0;
3014 else
3015 {
3016 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
906c4e36
RK
3017 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3018 && (lv & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
3019 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1))) != 0)
3020 lv -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
f72aed24 3021
906c4e36 3022 hv = (lv < 0) ? ~ (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0 : 0;
f72aed24
RS
3023 }
3024 break;
3025
d45cf215
RS
3026 case SQRT:
3027 return 0;
3028
7afe21cc
RK
3029 default:
3030 return 0;
3031 }
3032
3033 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3034 }
3035
3036#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3037 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
3038 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
3039 {
3040 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3041 jmp_buf handler;
3042 rtx x;
3043
3044 if (setjmp (handler))
3045 /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
3046 People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
3047 to do it should not get a warning. */
3048 return 0;
3049
3050 set_float_handler (handler);
3051
3052 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3053
3054 switch (code)
3055 {
3056 case NEG:
3057 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3058 break;
3059
3060 case ABS:
8b3686ed 3061 if (REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (d))
7afe21cc
RK
3062 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3063 break;
3064
3065 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
5352b11a 3066 d = (double) real_value_truncate (mode, d);
7afe21cc
RK
3067 break;
3068
3069 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
3070 /* All this does is change the mode. */
3071 break;
3072
3073 case FIX:
3074 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
3075 break;
3076
3077 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3078 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
3079 break;
3080
d45cf215
RS
3081 case SQRT:
3082 return 0;
3083
7afe21cc
RK
3084 default:
3085 abort ();
3086 }
3087
3088 x = immed_real_const_1 (d, mode);
906c4e36 3089 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
7afe21cc
RK
3090 return x;
3091 }
3092 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
906c4e36 3093 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
7afe21cc
RK
3094 {
3095 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3096 jmp_buf handler;
3097 rtx x;
906c4e36 3098 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
7afe21cc
RK
3099
3100 if (setjmp (handler))
3101 return 0;
3102
3103 set_float_handler (handler);
3104
3105 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3106
3107 switch (code)
3108 {
3109 case FIX:
3110 val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
3111 break;
3112
3113 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3114 val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
3115 break;
3116
3117 default:
3118 abort ();
3119 }
3120
906c4e36 3121 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
7afe21cc
RK
3122
3123 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3124 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3125 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3126 unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
3127 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3128 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3129 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
3130 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc 3131
906c4e36 3132 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
3133 }
3134#endif
a6acbe15
RS
3135 /* This was formerly used only for non-IEEE float.
3136 eggert@twinsun.com says it is safe for IEEE also. */
3137 else
7afe21cc
RK
3138 {
3139 /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
a6acbe15 3140 aren't constant. */
7afe21cc
RK
3141 switch (code)
3142 {
3143 case NEG:
3144 case NOT:
3145 /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG. */
3146 if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
3147 return XEXP (op, 0);
3148 break;
3149
3150 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3151 /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
3152 becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE. This allows
3153 folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
3154 the Vax). */
3155 if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
3156 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
3157 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
3158 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
3159 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
3160 return XEXP (op, 0);
3161 break;
3162 }
3163
3164 return 0;
3165 }
7afe21cc
RK
3166}
3167\f
3168/* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
3169 and OP1. Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
3170
3171 Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
3172 Use simplify_relational_operation instead. */
3173
3174rtx
3175simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3176 enum rtx_code code;
3177 enum machine_mode mode;
3178 rtx op0, op1;
3179{
906c4e36
RK
3180 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3181 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
7afe21cc
RK
3182 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3183
3184 /* Relational operations don't work here. We must know the mode
3185 of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
3186 Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
3187 Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode. */
3188
3189 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
3190 abort ();
3191
3192#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3193 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
3194 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3195 && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
3196 {
3197 REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
3198 jmp_buf handler;
3199
3200 if (setjmp (handler))
3201 return 0;
3202
3203 set_float_handler (handler);
3204
3205 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
3206 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
5352b11a
RS
3207 f0 = real_value_truncate (mode, f0);
3208 f1 = real_value_truncate (mode, f1);
7afe21cc
RK
3209
3210#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
3211 REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, code, f0, f1);
3212#else
3213 switch (code)
3214 {
3215 case PLUS:
3216 value = f0 + f1;
3217 break;
3218 case MINUS:
3219 value = f0 - f1;
3220 break;
3221 case MULT:
3222 value = f0 * f1;
3223 break;
3224 case DIV:
3225#ifndef REAL_INFINITY
3226 if (f1 == 0)
3227 abort ();
3228#endif
3229 value = f0 / f1;
3230 break;
3231 case SMIN:
3232 value = MIN (f0, f1);
3233 break;
3234 case SMAX:
3235 value = MAX (f0, f1);
3236 break;
3237 default:
3238 abort ();
3239 }
3240#endif
3241
906c4e36 3242 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
5352b11a 3243 value = real_value_truncate (mode, value);
7afe21cc
RK
3244 return immed_real_const_1 (value, mode);
3245 }
3246
3247 /* We can fold some multi-word operations. */
3248 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3249 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3250 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
3251 {
906c4e36 3252 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
7afe21cc
RK
3253
3254 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
3255
3256 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3257 l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
3258 else
3259 l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3260
3261 switch (code)
3262 {
3263 case MINUS:
3264 /* A - B == A + (-B). */
3265 neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3266 l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
3267
3268 /* .. fall through ... */
3269
3270 case PLUS:
3271 add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3272 break;
3273
3274 case MULT:
3275 mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3276 break;
3277
3278 case DIV: case MOD: case UDIV: case UMOD:
3279 /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
3280 it. */
3281 return 0;
3282
3283 case AND:
3284 lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
3285 break;
3286
3287 case IOR:
3288 lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
3289 break;
3290
3291 case XOR:
3292 lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
3293 break;
3294
3295 case SMIN:
906c4e36
RK
3296 if (h1 < h2
3297 || (h1 == h2
3298 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3299 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3300 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3301 else
3302 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3303 break;
3304
3305 case SMAX:
906c4e36
RK
3306 if (h1 > h2
3307 || (h1 == h2
3308 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3309 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3310 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3311 else
3312 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3313 break;
3314
3315 case UMIN:
906c4e36
RK
3316 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3317 || (h1 == h2
3318 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3319 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3320 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3321 else
3322 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3323 break;
3324
3325 case UMAX:
906c4e36
RK
3326 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3327 || (h1 == h2
3328 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3329 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3330 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3331 else
3332 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3333 break;
3334
3335 case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
3336 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFT:
3337 case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
3338#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3339 l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
3340#endif
3341
3342 if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
3343 return 0;
3344
3345 if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
3346 rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3347 code == ASHIFTRT);
3348 else if (code == ASHIFT || code == LSHIFT)
3349 lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3350 code == ASHIFT);
3351 else if (code == ROTATE)
3352 lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3353 else /* code == ROTATERT */
3354 rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3355 break;
3356
3357 default:
3358 return 0;
3359 }
3360
3361 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3362 }
3363#endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
3364
3365 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
906c4e36 3366 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT || width == 0)
7afe21cc
RK
3367 {
3368 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3369 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3370
3371 switch (code)
3372 {
3373 case PLUS:
3374 /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x. Similarly
3375 for the other optimizations below. */
3376 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3377 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3378 break;
3379
3380 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3381 return op0;
3382
3383 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3384 the cases below. */
3385 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3386 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3387 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3388 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3389
3390 /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
3391 if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
3392 {
3393 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3394 op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3395 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3396 }
3397 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3398 {
3399 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3400 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3401 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3402 }
3403
3404 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3405 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3406 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3407 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3408 break;
3409
3410 /* (a - b) + b -> a, similarly a + (b - a) -> a */
3411 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3412 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3413 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3414
3415 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3416 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3417 return XEXP (op1, 0);
3418
3419 /* (c1 - a) + c2 becomes (c1 + c2) - a. */
3420 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3421 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3422 {
3423 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op1,
3424 XEXP (op0, 0));
3425
3426 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op0, 1)) : 0;
3427 }
3428
3429 /* Handle both-operands-constant cases. */
3430 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && CONSTANT_P (op1)
3431 && GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_DOUBLE
3432 && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
3433 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3434 {
3435 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3436 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3437 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
3438 return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
51b00347
RS
3439 else
3440 break;
3441#if 0 /* No good, because this can produce the sum of two relocatable
3442 symbols, in an assembler instruction. Most UNIX assemblers can't
3443 handle that. */
7afe21cc
RK
3444 else
3445 return gen_rtx (CONST, mode,
3446 gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
3447 GET_CODE (op0) == CONST
3448 ? XEXP (op0, 0) : op0,
3449 GET_CODE (op1) == CONST
3450 ? XEXP (op1, 0) : op1));
51b00347 3451#endif
7afe21cc
RK
3452 }
3453 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3454 && GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3455 && (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
3456 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))))
3457 /* constant + (variable + constant)
3458 can result if an index register is made constant.
3459 We simplify this by adding the constants.
3460 If we did not, it would become an invalid address. */
3461 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3462 break;
3463
3464 case COMPARE:
3465#ifdef HAVE_cc0
3466 /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
3467 using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
3468 so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
3469
3470 In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */
3471
3472 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3473 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3474 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3475 return op0;
3476#else
3477 /* Do nothing here. */
3478#endif
3479 break;
3480
3481 case MINUS:
21648b45
RK
3482 /* None of these optimizations can be done for IEEE
3483 floating point. */
3484 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3485 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3486 break;
3487
3488 /* We can't assume x-x is 0 even with non-IEEE floating point. */
7afe21cc
RK
3489 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3490 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
7afe21cc
RK
3491 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT)
3492 return const0_rtx;
3493
3494 /* Change subtraction from zero into negation. */
3495 if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3496 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
3497
7afe21cc
RK
3498 /* Subtracting 0 has no effect. */
3499 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3500 return op0;
3501
3502 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3503 the cases below. */
3504 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3505 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3506 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3507 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3508
3509 /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b). */
3510 if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3511 {
3512 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
3513 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3514 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3515 }
3516
3517 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3518 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3519 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3520 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3521 break;
3522
3523 /* (a + b) - a -> b, and (b - (a + b)) -> -a */
3524 if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3525 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1)
3526 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3527 return XEXP (op0, 1);
3528 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3529 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1)
3530 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3531 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3532
3533 if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3534 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)
3535 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3536 {
3537 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1),
3538 mode);
3539
3540 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1));
3541 }
3542 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3543 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0)
3544 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3545 {
3546 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0),
3547 mode);
3548
3549 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0));
3550 }
3551
3552 /* a - (a - b) -> b */
3553 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS && rtx_equal_p (op0, XEXP (op1, 0))
3554 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3555 return XEXP (op1, 1);
3556
3557 /* (a +/- b) - (a +/- c) can be simplified. Do variants of
3558 this involving commutativity. The most common case is
3559 (a + C1) - (a + C2), but it's not hard to do all the cases. */
3560 if ((GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS)
3561 && (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS))
3562 {
3563 rtx lhs0 = XEXP (op0, 0), lhs1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
3564 rtx rhs0 = XEXP (op1, 0), rhs1 = XEXP (op1, 1);
3565 int lhs_neg = GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS;
3566 int rhs_neg = GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS;
3567 rtx lhs = 0, rhs = 0;
3568
3569 /* Set LHS and RHS to the two different terms. */
3570 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs0) && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3571 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs1;
3572 else if (! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs1)
3573 && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3574 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs0;
3575 else if (! lhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs0)
3576 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3577 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs1;
3578 else if (! lhs_neg && ! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs1)
3579 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3580 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs0;
3581
3582 /* The RHS is the operand of a MINUS, so its negation
3583 status should be complemented. */
3584 rhs_neg = ! rhs_neg;
3585
3586 /* If we found two values equal, form the sum or difference
3587 of the remaining two terms. */
3588 if (lhs)
3589 {
3590 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3591 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3592 mode,
3593 lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3594 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3595 if (tem == 0)
3596 tem = gen_rtx (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3597 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3598 mode, lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3599 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3600
3601 /* If both sides negated, negate result. */
3602 if (lhs_neg && rhs_neg)
3603 {
3604 rtx tem1
3605 = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, tem, mode);
3606 if (tem1 == 0)
3607 tem1 = gen_rtx (NEG, mode, tem);
3608 tem = tem1;
3609 }
3610
3611 return tem;
3612 }
3613
3614 return 0;
3615 }
3616
3617 /* c1 - (a + c2) becomes (c1 - c2) - a. */
3618 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3619 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3620 {
3621 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3622 XEXP (op1, 1));
3623
3624 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op1, 0)) : 0;
3625 }
3626
3627 /* c1 - (c2 - a) becomes (c1 - c2) + a. */
3628 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3629 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3630 {
3631 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3632 XEXP (op1, 0));
3633
3634 return (tem && GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
3635 ? plus_constant (XEXP (op1, 1), INTVAL (tem))
3636 : 0);
3637 }
3638
3639 /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff. */
3640 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3641 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
3642 break;
3643
3644 case MULT:
3645 if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
3646 {
3647 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
3648
3649 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3650 }
3651
3652 /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0. */
3653 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3654 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3655 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3656 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3657 return op1;
3658
3659 /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
3660 However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
3661 so we can do this anyway. */
3662 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3663 return op0;
3664
3665 /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift. */
3666 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3667 && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0)
906c4e36 3668 return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (val));
7afe21cc
RK
3669
3670 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3671 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3672 {
3673 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3674 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3675
3676 /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
3677 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2)
3678 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3679 return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
3680
3681 else if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1)
3682 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3683 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3684 }
3685 break;
3686
3687 case IOR:
3688 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3689 return op0;
3690 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3691 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3692 return op1;
3693 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3694 return op0;
3695 /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
3696 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3697 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3698 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3699 return constm1_rtx;
3700 break;
3701
3702 case XOR:
3703 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3704 return op0;
3705 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3706 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3707 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
3708 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3709 return const0_rtx;
3710 break;
3711
3712 case AND:
3713 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3714 return const0_rtx;
3715 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3716 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3717 return op0;
3718 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3719 return op0;
3720 /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
3721 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3722 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3723 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3724 return const0_rtx;
3725 break;
3726
3727 case UDIV:
3728 /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
3729 below). */
3730 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3731 && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
906c4e36 3732 return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (arg1));
7afe21cc
RK
3733
3734 /* ... fall through ... */
3735
3736 case DIV:
3737 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3738 return op0;
e7a522ba
RS
3739
3740 /* In IEEE floating point, 0/x is not always 0. */
3741 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3742 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3743 && op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3744 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
7afe21cc 3745 return op0;
e7a522ba 3746
7afe21cc
RK
3747#if 0 /* Turned off till an expert says this is a safe thing to do. */
3748#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3749 /* Change division by a constant into multiplication. */
3750 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3751 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
3752 && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode))
3753 {
3754 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3755 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3756 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
3757 abort();
3758#if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3759 REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, RDIV_EXPR, dconst1, d);
3760 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3761 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
3762#else
3763 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3764 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
3765 }
3766#endif
3767#endif
3768#endif
3769 break;
3770
3771 case UMOD:
3772 /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below). */
3773 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3774 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
906c4e36 3775 return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0, GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) - 1));
7afe21cc
RK
3776
3777 /* ... fall through ... */
3778
3779 case MOD:
3780 if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
3781 && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3782 return const0_rtx;
3783 break;
3784
3785 case ROTATERT:
3786 case ROTATE:
3787 /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0. */
906c4e36 3788 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7afe21cc
RK
3789 && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3790 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3791 return op0;
3792
3793 /* ... fall through ... */
3794
3795 case LSHIFT:
3796 case ASHIFT:
3797 case ASHIFTRT:
3798 case LSHIFTRT:
3799 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3800 return op0;
3801 if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3802 return op0;
3803 break;
3804
3805 case SMIN:
906c4e36
RK
3806 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3807 && INTVAL (op1) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width -1)
7afe21cc
RK
3808 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3809 return op1;
3810 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3811 return op0;
3812 break;
3813
3814 case SMAX:
906c4e36 3815 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
7afe21cc
RK
3816 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1
3817 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3818 return op1;
3819 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3820 return op0;
3821 break;
3822
3823 case UMIN:
3824 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3825 return op1;
3826 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3827 return op0;
3828 break;
3829
3830 case UMAX:
3831 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3832 return op1;
3833 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3834 return op0;
3835 break;
3836
3837 default:
3838 abort ();
3839 }
3840
3841 return 0;
3842 }
3843
3844 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3845 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3846
3847 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3848 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3849
906c4e36 3850 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 3851 {
906c4e36
RK
3852 arg0 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3853 arg1 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc
RK
3854
3855 arg0s = arg0;
906c4e36
RK
3856 if (arg0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3857 arg0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
7afe21cc
RK
3858
3859 arg1s = arg1;
906c4e36
RK
3860 if (arg1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3861 arg1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
7afe21cc
RK
3862 }
3863 else
3864 {
3865 arg0s = arg0;
3866 arg1s = arg1;
3867 }
3868
3869 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3870
3871 switch (code)
3872 {
3873 case PLUS:
538b78e7 3874 val = arg0s + arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3875 break;
3876
3877 case MINUS:
538b78e7 3878 val = arg0s - arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3879 break;
3880
3881 case MULT:
3882 val = arg0s * arg1s;
3883 break;
3884
3885 case DIV:
3886 if (arg1s == 0)
3887 return 0;
3888 val = arg0s / arg1s;
3889 break;
3890
3891 case MOD:
3892 if (arg1s == 0)
3893 return 0;
3894 val = arg0s % arg1s;
3895 break;
3896
3897 case UDIV:
3898 if (arg1 == 0)
3899 return 0;
906c4e36 3900 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 / arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
3901 break;
3902
3903 case UMOD:
3904 if (arg1 == 0)
3905 return 0;
906c4e36 3906 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 % arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
3907 break;
3908
3909 case AND:
3910 val = arg0 & arg1;
3911 break;
3912
3913 case IOR:
3914 val = arg0 | arg1;
3915 break;
3916
3917 case XOR:
3918 val = arg0 ^ arg1;
3919 break;
3920
3921 case LSHIFTRT:
3922 /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
3923 what it wants. But truncate it if the machine will do that. */
3924 if (arg1 < 0)
3925 return 0;
3926
3927#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3928 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3929#endif
3930
3931 if (arg1 >= width)
3932 return 0;
3933
906c4e36 3934 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
3935 break;
3936
3937 case ASHIFT:
3938 case LSHIFT:
3939 if (arg1 < 0)
3940 return 0;
3941
3942#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3943 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3944#endif
3945
3946 if (arg1 >= width)
3947 return 0;
3948
906c4e36 3949 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
3950 break;
3951
3952 case ASHIFTRT:
3953 if (arg1 < 0)
3954 return 0;
3955
3956#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3957 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3958#endif
3959
3960 if (arg1 >= width)
3961 return 0;
3962
3963 val = arg0s >> arg1;
3964 break;
3965
3966 case ROTATERT:
3967 if (arg1 < 0)
3968 return 0;
3969
3970 arg1 %= width;
906c4e36
RK
3971 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << (width - arg1))
3972 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1));
7afe21cc
RK
3973 break;
3974
3975 case ROTATE:
3976 if (arg1 < 0)
3977 return 0;
3978
3979 arg1 %= width;
906c4e36
RK
3980 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1)
3981 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
7afe21cc
RK
3982 break;
3983
3984 case COMPARE:
3985 /* Do nothing here. */
3986 return 0;
3987
830a38ee
RS
3988 case SMIN:
3989 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3990 break;
3991
3992 case UMIN:
906c4e36
RK
3993 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
3994 <= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
830a38ee
RS
3995 break;
3996
3997 case SMAX:
3998 val = arg0s > arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3999 break;
4000
4001 case UMAX:
906c4e36
RK
4002 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
4003 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
830a38ee
RS
4004 break;
4005
7afe21cc
RK
4006 default:
4007 abort ();
4008 }
4009
4010 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4011 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4012 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
4013 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4014 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4015 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4016 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4017
4018 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
4019}
4020\f
4021/* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
4022 MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result. */
4023
4024rtx
4025simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
4026 enum rtx_code code;
4027 enum machine_mode mode;
4028 rtx op0, op1;
4029{
906c4e36
RK
4030 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
4031 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
7afe21cc
RK
4032 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4033
4034 /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
4035 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
4036 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
4037
4038 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
906c4e36 4039 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT || width == 0)
7afe21cc
RK
4040 {
4041 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
4042 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
4043
4044 /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know
4045 the result. */
4046 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
4047 && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4048 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_FLOAT))
4049 return (code == EQ || code == GE || code == LE || code == LEU
4050 || code == GEU) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4051 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
4052 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
4053 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
4054 {
4055 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
7afe21cc
RK
4056 jmp_buf handler;
4057 int op0lt, op1lt, equal;
4058
4059 if (setjmp (handler))
4060 return 0;
4061
4062 set_float_handler (handler);
4063 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
4064 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
4065 equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
4066 op0lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
4067 op1lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
906c4e36 4068 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
7afe21cc
RK
4069
4070 switch (code)
4071 {
4072 case EQ:
4073 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4074 case NE:
4075 return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4076 case LE:
4077 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4078 case LT:
4079 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4080 case GE:
4081 return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4082 case GT:
4083 return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4084 }
4085 }
4086
4087 switch (code)
4088 {
4089 case EQ:
4090 {
4091#if 0
4092 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
4093 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4094 return const0_rtx;
4095#endif
8b3686ed
RK
4096 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
4097 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4098 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
4099 return const0_rtx;
4100 break;
4101 }
4102
4103 case NE:
4104#if 0
4105 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
4106 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4107 return const_true_rtx;
4108#endif
8b3686ed
RK
4109 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
4110 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4111 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
4112 return const_true_rtx;
4113 break;
4114
4115 case GEU:
4116 /* Unsigned values are never negative, but we must be sure we are
4117 actually comparing a value, not a CC operand. */
4118 if (op1 == const0_rtx
4119 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4120 return const_true_rtx;
4121 break;
4122
4123 case LTU:
4124 if (op1 == const0_rtx
4125 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4126 return const0_rtx;
4127 break;
4128
4129 case LEU:
4130 /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
4131 unsigned value. */
4132 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4133 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4134 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4135 return const_true_rtx;
4136 break;
4137
4138 case GTU:
4139 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4140 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4141 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4142 return const0_rtx;
4143 break;
4144 }
4145
4146 return 0;
4147 }
4148
4149 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
4150 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
4151
4152 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
4153 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
4154
906c4e36 4155 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 4156 {
906c4e36
RK
4157 arg0 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4158 arg1 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc
RK
4159
4160 arg0s = arg0;
906c4e36
RK
4161 if (arg0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4162 arg0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
7afe21cc
RK
4163
4164 arg1s = arg1;
906c4e36
RK
4165 if (arg1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4166 arg1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
7afe21cc
RK
4167 }
4168 else
4169 {
4170 arg0s = arg0;
4171 arg1s = arg1;
4172 }
4173
4174 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
4175
4176 switch (code)
4177 {
4178 case NE:
4179 val = arg0 != arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4180 break;
4181
4182 case EQ:
4183 val = arg0 == arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4184 break;
4185
4186 case LE:
4187 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4188 break;
4189
4190 case LT:
4191 val = arg0s < arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4192 break;
4193
4194 case GE:
4195 val = arg0s >= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4196 break;
4197
4198 case GT:
4199 val = arg0s > arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4200 break;
4201
4202 case LEU:
906c4e36
RK
4203 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4204 <= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
7afe21cc
RK
4205 break;
4206
4207 case LTU:
906c4e36
RK
4208 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4209 < ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
7afe21cc
RK
4210 break;
4211
4212 case GEU:
906c4e36
RK
4213 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4214 >= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
7afe21cc
RK
4215 break;
4216
4217 case GTU:
906c4e36
RK
4218 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4219 > ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
7afe21cc
RK
4220 break;
4221
4222 default:
4223 abort ();
4224 }
4225
4226 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4227 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4228 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
4229 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4230 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4231 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4232 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc 4233
906c4e36 4234 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
4235}
4236\f
4237/* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
4238 OP0, OP1, and OP2. OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
4239 a constant. Return 0 if no simplifications is possible. */
4240
4241rtx
4242simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
4243 enum rtx_code code;
4244 enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
4245 rtx op0, op1, op2;
4246{
4247 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4248
4249 /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision. */
4250 if (width == 0)
906c4e36 4251 width = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT;
7afe21cc
RK
4252
4253 switch (code)
4254 {
4255 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4256 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4257 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
4258 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4259 && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
4260 && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
906c4e36 4261 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc
RK
4262 {
4263 /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
906c4e36 4264 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (op0);
7afe21cc
RK
4265
4266#if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
4267 val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
4268#else
4269 val >>= INTVAL (op2);
4270#endif
906c4e36 4271 if (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != INTVAL (op1))
7afe21cc
RK
4272 {
4273 /* First zero-extend. */
906c4e36 4274 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
7afe21cc 4275 /* If desired, propagate sign bit. */
906c4e36
RK
4276 if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT
4277 && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
4278 val |= ~ (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1);
7afe21cc
RK
4279 }
4280
4281 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
4282 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
4283 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
4284 unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
4285 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4286 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4287 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4288 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc 4289
906c4e36 4290 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
4291 }
4292 break;
4293
4294 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
4295 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4296 return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
4297 break;
4298
4299 default:
4300 abort ();
4301 }
4302
4303 return 0;
4304}
4305\f
4306/* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
4307 for which a constant value can be determined, return
4308 the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
4309 Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
4310 modified by recursive calls to this function.
4311
4312 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
4313 return those contents. This is because an instruction that
4314 uses a register is usually faster than one that uses a constant.
4315
4316 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
4317 of X before modifying it. */
4318
4319static rtx
4320fold_rtx (x, insn)
4321 rtx x;
4322 rtx insn;
4323{
4324 register enum rtx_code code;
4325 register enum machine_mode mode;
4326 register char *fmt;
906c4e36 4327 register int i;
7afe21cc
RK
4328 rtx new = 0;
4329 int copied = 0;
4330 int must_swap = 0;
4331
4332 /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X. */
4333 rtx folded_arg0;
4334 rtx folded_arg1;
4335
4336 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
4337 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
4338 rtx const_arg0;
4339 rtx const_arg1;
4340 rtx const_arg2;
4341
4342 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
4343 extends. */
4344 enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
4345
4346 if (x == 0)
4347 return x;
4348
4349 mode = GET_MODE (x);
4350 code = GET_CODE (x);
4351 switch (code)
4352 {
4353 case CONST:
4354 case CONST_INT:
4355 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4356 case SYMBOL_REF:
4357 case LABEL_REF:
4358 case REG:
4359 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
4360 since they are used only for lists of args
4361 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
4362 case EXPR_LIST:
4363 return x;
4364
4365#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4366 case CC0:
4367 return prev_insn_cc0;
4368#endif
4369
4370 case PC:
4371 /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
4372 PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label. That
4373 lets us fold switch statements on the Vax. */
4374 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
4375 {
4376 rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
4377
4378 if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
4379 && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
4380 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
4381 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
4382 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
4383 return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
4384 }
4385 break;
4386
4387 case SUBREG:
c610adec
RK
4388 /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
4389 if ((new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
4390 || (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0)
7afe21cc
RK
4391 return new;
4392
4b980e20
RK
4393 /* If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, we have no idea what value the
4394 extra bits would have. However, if the operand is equivalent
4395 to a SUBREG whose operand is the same as our mode, and all the
4396 modes are within a word, we can just use the inner operand
4397 because these SUBREGs just say how to treat the register. */
4398
e5f6a288 4399 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4b980e20
RK
4400 {
4401 enum machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
4402 struct table_elt *elt;
4403
4404 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4405 && GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4406 && (elt = lookup (SUBREG_REG (x), HASH (SUBREG_REG (x), imode),
4407 imode)) != 0)
4408 {
4409 for (elt = elt->first_same_value;
4410 elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4411 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4412 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
906c4e36 4413 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4b980e20
RK
4414 return copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4415 }
4416
4417 return x;
4418 }
e5f6a288 4419
7afe21cc
RK
4420 /* Fold SUBREG_REG. If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
4421 We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
4422 integral mode or extracting the low part. */
4423
4424 folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
4425 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4426 if (const_arg0)
4427 folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
4428
4429 if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
4430 {
4431 new = 0;
4432
4433 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4434 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4435 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
4436 new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
4437 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
4438 if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4439 new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
4440 if (new)
4441 return new;
4442 }
e5f6a288
RK
4443
4444 /* If this is a narrowing SUBREG and our operand is a REG, see if
858a47b1 4445 we can find an equivalence for REG that is an arithmetic operation
e5f6a288
RK
4446 in a wider mode where both operands are paradoxical SUBREGs
4447 from objects of our result mode. In that case, we couldn't report
4448 an equivalent value for that operation, since we don't know what the
4449 extra bits will be. But we can find an equivalence for this SUBREG
4450 by folding that operation is the narrow mode. This allows us to
4451 fold arithmetic in narrow modes when the machine only supports
4b980e20
RK
4452 word-sized arithmetic.
4453
4454 Also look for a case where we have a SUBREG whose operand is the
4455 same as our result. If both modes are smaller than a word, we
4456 are simply interpreting a register in different modes and we
4457 can use the inner value. */
e5f6a288
RK
4458
4459 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4460 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)))
4461 {
4462 struct table_elt *elt;
4463
4464 /* We can use HASH here since we know that canon_hash won't be
4465 called. */
4466 elt = lookup (folded_arg0,
4467 HASH (folded_arg0, GET_MODE (folded_arg0)),
4468 GET_MODE (folded_arg0));
4469
4470 if (elt)
4471 elt = elt->first_same_value;
4472
4473 for (; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4474 {
4475 /* Just check for unary and binary operations. */
4476 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '1'
4477 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != SIGN_EXTEND
4478 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != ZERO_EXTEND
4479 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4480 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))) == mode)
4481 {
4482 rtx op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4483
4484 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
906c4e36 4485 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
e5f6a288
RK
4486
4487 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4488 if (op0)
4489 new = simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4490 op0, mode);
4491 }
4492 else if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '2'
4493 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == 'c')
4494 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4495 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4496 == mode))
4497 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4498 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == SUBREG
4499 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)))
4500 == mode))
4501 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 1))))
4502 {
4503 rtx op0 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4504 rtx op1 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 1));
4505
4506 if (op0 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
906c4e36 4507 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
e5f6a288
RK
4508
4509 if (op0)
4510 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4511
4512 if (op1 && GET_CODE (op1) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op1))
906c4e36 4513 op1 = fold_rtx (op1, NULL_RTX);
e5f6a288
RK
4514
4515 if (op1)
4516 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4517
4518 if (op0 && op1)
4519 new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4520 op0, op1);
4521 }
4522
4b980e20
RK
4523 else if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4524 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
4525 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0))
4526 <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
906c4e36 4527 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4b980e20
RK
4528 new = copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4529
e5f6a288
RK
4530 if (new)
4531 return new;
4532 }
4533 }
4534
7afe21cc
RK
4535 return x;
4536
4537 case NOT:
4538 case NEG:
4539 /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
4540 If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z. Similarly for NEG. */
4541 new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
4542 if (new)
4543 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
4544 break;
4545
4546 case MEM:
4547 /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
4548 best address. Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
4549 MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against. */
4550 if (insn != 0)
4551 find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
4552
4553 {
4554 /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
4555 we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant. */
906c4e36 4556 rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc 4557 rtx base = 0;
906c4e36 4558 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
4559
4560 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
4561 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
4562 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
4563 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
4564 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
4565
4566 /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset. */
4567 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
4568 base = addr;
4569 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
4570 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
4571 {
4572 base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
4573 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
4574 }
4575 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
4576 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4577 base = XEXP (addr, 1);
4578
4579 /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
4580 constant to allow better value tracking. */
4581 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
4582 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
4583 {
4584 rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
4585 enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
4586 rtx new;
4587
4588 if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
4589 constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
4590
4591 /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence. */
4592 if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
4593 return constant;
4594
4595 /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
4596 anything. Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
4597 extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
4598 the low-order bits. Other cases don't seem common enough to
4599 worry about. */
4600 if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
4601 return x;
4602
4603 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4604 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4605 && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
4606 && (new = operand_subword (constant,
4607 offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
4608 0, const_mode)) != 0)
4609 return new;
4610
4611 if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4612 && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
4613 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
4614 && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
4615 return new;
4616 }
4617
4618 /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
4619 table, we also know its value. */
4620 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
4621 {
4622 rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
4623 rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
4624
4625 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4626 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
4627 {
4628 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4629
4630 if (offset >= 0
4631 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4632 < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
4633 return XVECEXP (table, 0,
4634 offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
4635 }
4636 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4637 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
4638 {
4639 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4640
4641 if (offset >= 0
4642 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4643 < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
4644 {
4645 offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
4646 new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
4647 XEXP (table, 0));
4648
4649 if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
4650 new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
4651
4652 return new;
4653 }
4654 }
4655 }
4656
4657 return x;
4658 }
4659 }
4660
4661 const_arg0 = 0;
4662 const_arg1 = 0;
4663 const_arg2 = 0;
4664 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
4665
4666 /* Try folding our operands.
4667 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
4668
4669 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4670 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4671 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4672 {
4673 rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
4674 rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
4675 enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
4676 rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
4677 rtx replacements[2];
4678 int j;
4679
4680 /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially. */
4681 switch (GET_CODE (arg))
4682 {
4683 case REG:
4684 /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
4685 here for speed. */
4686 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
4687 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
4688 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
4689 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
4690 const_arg
4691 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
4692 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
4693 break;
4694
4695 case CONST:
4696 case CONST_INT:
4697 case SYMBOL_REF:
4698 case LABEL_REF:
4699 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4700 const_arg = arg;
4701 break;
4702
4703#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4704 case CC0:
4705 folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
4706 mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
4707 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4708 break;
4709#endif
4710
4711 default:
4712 folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
4713 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4714 }
4715
4716 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
4717 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
4718 switch (i)
4719 {
4720 case 0:
4721 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
4722 const_arg0 = const_arg;
4723 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
4724 break;
4725 case 1:
4726 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
4727 const_arg1 = const_arg;
4728 break;
4729 case 2:
4730 const_arg2 = const_arg;
4731 break;
4732 }
4733
4734 /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
4735 equivalent constant argument. */
4736 if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
4737 || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
4738 cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
4739 else
4740 cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
4741
4742 /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
4743 possibilities. If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
4744 two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
4745 If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
4746 than what is already there. */
4747
4748 if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
4749 continue;
4750
4751 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4752 {
4753 x = copy_rtx (x);
4754 copied = 1;
4755 }
4756
4757 replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
4758 for (j = 0;
4759 j < 2 && replacements[j]
4760 && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
4761 j++)
4762 {
4763 if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
4764 break;
4765
4766 if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4767 {
4768 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
4769 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
4770
4771 if (apply_change_group ())
4772 {
4773 /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
4774 continue and flag them to be swapped back later. */
4775 rtx tem;
4776
4777 tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
4778 XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
4779 must_swap = 1;
4780 break;
4781 }
4782 }
4783 }
4784 }
4785
4786 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
4787 /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
4788 Doing nothing is harmless. */
4789 ;
4790
4791 /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
4792 operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer. Otherwise,
4793 place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant. */
4794
4795 if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4796 {
4797 if (must_swap || (const_arg0
4798 && (const_arg1 == 0
4799 || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
4800 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
4801 {
4802 register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
4803
4804 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4805 {
4806 x = copy_rtx (x);
4807 copied = 1;
4808 }
4809
4810 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
4811 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
4812 if (apply_change_group ())
4813 {
4814 tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
4815 tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
4816 }
4817 }
4818 }
4819
4820 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
4821
4822 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
4823 {
4824 case '1':
e4890d45
RS
4825 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the original mode. */
4826 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
4827 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
4828 break;
7afe21cc
RK
4829 new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
4830 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4831 mode_arg0);
4832 break;
4833
4834 case '<':
4835 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
4836 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
4837 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
4838 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
4839
4840 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4841 {
4842 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
c610adec
RK
4843 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
4844
4845#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4846 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode))
4847 {
4848 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
4849 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
4850 }
4851#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4852
4853 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1);
4854 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4855 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
4856
4857 /* Get a mode from the values actually being compared, or from the
4858 old value of MODE_ARG0 if both are constants. If the resulting
4859 mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know what kinds
4860 of things are being compared, so we can't do anything with this
4861 comparison. */
4862
4863 if (GET_MODE (folded_arg0) != VOIDmode
4864 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)) != MODE_CC)
4865 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg0);
4866
4867 else if (GET_MODE (folded_arg1) != VOIDmode
4868 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg1)) != MODE_CC)
4869 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg1);
4870
4871 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
4872 break;
4873
4874 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
4875 can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison. */
4876 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4877 {
4878 /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant? Or non-explicit
4879 constant? These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
4880 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
4881 && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
4882#if 0 /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
4883 come out as 0. */
4884 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
4885#endif
4886 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
4887 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
4888 {
4889 if (code == EQ)
c610adec 4890 return false;
7afe21cc 4891 else if (code == NE)
c610adec 4892 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4893 }
4894
4895 /* See if the two operands are the same. We don't do this
4896 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
4897 since x might be a NaN. */
4898
4899 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4900 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) != MODE_FLOAT)
4901 && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
4902 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4903 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4904 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
4905 == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
4906 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
4907 (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
4908 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4909 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
4910 (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
4911 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4912 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
4913 return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
4914 || code == LEU || code == GEU)
c610adec 4915 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
4916
4917 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
4918 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
4919 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
4920 else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
4921 {
4922 int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
4923
4924 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
4925 && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
4926 || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4927 reverse_condition (code))
4928 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_INT))
4929 && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
4930 || (const_arg1
4931 && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
4932 const_arg1))
4933 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4934 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
4935 == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
4936 return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4937 code)
c610adec 4938 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
4939 }
4940 }
4941 }
4942
4943 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
4944 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
4945 determine the result of this comparison. */
4946
4947 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
4948 {
4949 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
4950 rtx inner_const;
4951
4952 if (y != 0
4953 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
4954 && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
4955 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
4956 {
4957 int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
906c4e36
RK
4958 int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT >= sign_bitnum
4959 && (INTVAL (inner_const)
4960 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << sign_bitnum)));
c610adec
RK
4961 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
4962
4963#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4964 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode))
4965 {
4966 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
4967 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
4968 }
4969#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4970
4971 switch (code)
4972 {
4973 case EQ:
c610adec 4974 return false;
7afe21cc 4975 case NE:
c610adec 4976 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4977 case LT: case LE:
4978 if (has_sign)
c610adec 4979 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4980 break;
4981 case GT: case GE:
4982 if (has_sign)
c610adec 4983 return false;
7afe21cc
RK
4984 break;
4985 }
4986 }
4987 }
4988
4989 new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
4990 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4991 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
c610adec
RK
4992#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4993 if (new != 0 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
4994 new = ((new == const0_rtx) ? CONST0_RTX (mode)
4995 : immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode));
4996#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4997 break;
4998
4999 case '2':
5000 case 'c':
5001 switch (code)
5002 {
5003 case PLUS:
5004 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
5005 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
5006 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
5007 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
5008 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
5009 {
5010 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
5011
5012 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
5013 && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
5014 return XEXP (y, 0);
5015 }
5016
5017 /* ... fall through ... */
5018
5019 case MINUS:
5020 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
5021 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
5022 case MULT: case DIV: case UDIV:
5023 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
5024 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
5025 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
5026 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
5027 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
5028 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
5029 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
5030
5031 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
5032 && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
5033 {
5034 int is_shift
5035 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
5036 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
5037 rtx inner_const;
5038 enum rtx_code associate_code;
5039 rtx new_const;
5040
5041 if (y == 0
5042 || 0 == (inner_const
5043 = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
5044 || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
5045 /* If we have compiled a statement like
5046 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
5047 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
5048 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
5049 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
5050 || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
5051 break;
5052
5053 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
5054 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
5055 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
5056 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
5057
5058 if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
5059 && (0
5060#if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
5061 || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5062#endif
5063#if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
5064 || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5065#endif
5066 ))
5067 break;
5068
5069 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
5070 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT. */
5071
5072 associate_code
5073 = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
5074 : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
5075
5076 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
5077 const_arg1, inner_const);
5078
5079 if (new_const == 0)
5080 break;
5081
5082 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
5083 produce a shift of larger than the object. This could
5084 occur when we following a sign-extend by a right shift on
5085 a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair of shifts. */
5086
5087 if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
5088 && INTVAL (new_const) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
5089 break;
5090
5091 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
5092
5093 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
5094 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
5095 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
5096
5097 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
5098 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
5099
5100 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, y, new_const);
5101 if (new)
5102 return new;
5103
5104 return gen_rtx (code, mode, y, new_const);
5105 }
5106 }
5107
5108 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5109 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5110 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
5111 break;
5112
5113 case 'o':
5114 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
5115 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
5116 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
5117 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
5118 return const_arg1;
5119 break;
5120
5121 case '3':
5122 case 'b':
5123 new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
5124 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5125 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
5126 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
5127 break;
5128 }
5129
5130 return new ? new : x;
5131}
5132\f
5133/* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
5134 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
5135
5136static rtx
5137equiv_constant (x)
5138 rtx x;
5139{
5140 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
5141 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
5142 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
5143 x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
5144
5145 if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
5146 return x;
5147
fc3ffe83
RK
5148 /* If X is a MEM, try to fold it outside the context of any insn to see if
5149 it might be equivalent to a constant. That handles the case where it
5150 is a constant-pool reference. Then try to look it up in the hash table
5151 in case it is something whose value we have seen before. */
5152
5153 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5154 {
5155 struct table_elt *elt;
5156
906c4e36 5157 x = fold_rtx (x, NULL_RTX);
fc3ffe83
RK
5158 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
5159 return x;
5160
5161 elt = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, GET_MODE (x)) % NBUCKETS, GET_MODE (x));
5162 if (elt == 0)
5163 return 0;
5164
5165 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
5166 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
5167 return elt->exp;
5168 }
5169
7afe21cc
RK
5170 return 0;
5171}
5172\f
5173/* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
5174 number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
5175 least-significant part of X.
5176 MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.
5177
5178 If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
5179
5180 This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c. */
5181
5182rtx
5183gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
5184 enum machine_mode mode;
5185 register rtx x;
5186{
5187 rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
5188
5189 if (result)
5190 return result;
5191 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5192 {
5193 /* This is the only other case we handle. */
5194 register int offset = 0;
5195 rtx new;
5196
5197#if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
5198 offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
5199 - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
5200#endif
5201#if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
5202 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
5203 is unchanged. */
5204 offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5205 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
5206#endif
5207 new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
5208 if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
5209 return 0;
5210 MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
5211 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
5212 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
5213 return new;
5214 }
5215 else
5216 return 0;
5217}
5218\f
5219/* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
5220 branch. It will be zero if not.
5221
5222 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
5223 if we are following the taken case of
5224 if (i == 2)
5225 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
5226
5227 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
5228 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
5229
5230static void
5231record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
5232 rtx insn;
5233 int taken;
5234{
5235 int cond_known_true;
5236 rtx op0, op1;
5237 enum machine_mode mode;
5238 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
5239 enum rtx_code code;
5240
5241 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
5242 if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
5243 return;
5244
5245 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
5246 if (taken)
5247 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
5248 else
5249 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
5250
5251 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
5252 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
5253 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
5254 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
5255 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
5256 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
5257
5258 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1);
5259 if (! cond_known_true)
5260 {
5261 reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
5262 code = reverse_condition (code);
5263 }
5264
5265 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
5266 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
5267 if (mode == VOIDmode) mode = GET_MODE (op1);
5268
5269 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
5270}
5271
5272/* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
5273 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
5274 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
5275 above function and called recursively. */
5276
5277static void
5278record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
5279 enum rtx_code code;
5280 enum machine_mode mode;
5281 rtx op0, op1;
5282 int reversed_nonequality;
5283{
5284 int op0_hash_code, op1_hash_code;
5285 int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
5286 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
5287
5288 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
5289 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
5290 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
5291 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG. */
5292
5293 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5294 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5295 {
5296 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5297 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5298
5299 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5300 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5301 reversed_nonequality);
5302 }
5303
5304 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5305 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5306 {
5307 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5308 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5309
5310 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5311 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5312 reversed_nonequality);
5313 }
5314
5315 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
5316 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
5317
5318 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5319 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
5320 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5321 {
5322 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5323 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5324
5325 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5326 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5327 reversed_nonequality);
5328 }
5329
5330 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5331 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
5332 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5333 {
5334 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5335 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5336
5337 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5338 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5339 reversed_nonequality);
5340 }
5341
5342 /* Hash both operands. */
5343
5344 do_not_record = 0;
5345 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5346 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5347 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5348 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5349 op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5350
5351 if (do_not_record)
5352 return;
5353
5354 do_not_record = 0;
5355 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5356 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5357 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5358 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5359 op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5360
5361 if (do_not_record)
5362 return;
5363
5364 /* Look up both operands. */
5365 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5366 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash_code, mode);
5367
5368 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
5369 comparison. */
5370 if (code != EQ)
5371 {
5372 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
5373 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
5374 do anything. */
5375
5376 if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
5377 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
5378
5379 if ((reversed_nonequality && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
5380 || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
5381 return;
5382
5383 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
5384 new quantity number. */
5385 if (op0_elt == 0)
5386 {
906c4e36 5387 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
5388 {
5389 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5390 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5391 }
5392
906c4e36 5393 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL_PTR, op0_hash_code, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5394 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5395 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5396 }
5397
5398 qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
5399 if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
5400 {
5401 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
5402 if (op1_elt == 0)
5403 {
906c4e36 5404 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
5405 {
5406 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5407 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5408 }
5409
906c4e36 5410 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL_PTR, op1_hash_code, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5411 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5412 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5413 }
5414
5415 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
5416 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
5417 }
5418 else
5419 {
5420 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
5421 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
5422 }
5423
5424 return;
5425 }
5426
5427 /* If both are equivalent, merge the two classes. Save this class for
5428 `cse_set_around_loop'. */
5429 if (op0_elt && op1_elt)
5430 {
5431 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
5432 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5433 }
5434
5435 /* For whichever side doesn't have an equivalence, make one. */
5436 if (op0_elt == 0)
5437 {
5438 if (insert_regs (op0, op1_elt, 0))
5439 {
5440 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5441 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5442 }
5443
5444 op0_elt = insert (op0, op1_elt, op0_hash_code, mode);
5445 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5446 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5447 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5448 }
5449
5450 if (op1_elt == 0)
5451 {
5452 if (insert_regs (op1, op0_elt, 0))
5453 {
5454 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5455 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5456 }
5457
5458 op1_elt = insert (op1, op0_elt, op1_hash_code, mode);
5459 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5460 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5461 last_jump_equiv_class = op1_elt;
5462 }
5463}
5464\f
5465/* CSE processing for one instruction.
5466 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
5467 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
5468 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
5469 of available values.
5470
5471 If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
5472 the insn. */
5473
5474/* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
5475
5476struct set
5477{
5478 /* The SET rtx itself. */
5479 rtx rtl;
5480 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
5481 rtx src;
5482 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
5483 struct table_elt *src_elt;
5484 /* Hash code for the SET_SRC. */
5485 int src_hash_code;
5486 /* Hash code for the SET_DEST. */
5487 int dest_hash_code;
5488 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
5489 rtx inner_dest;
5490 /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found. */
5491 rtx *inner_dest_loc;
5492 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
5493 char src_in_memory;
5494 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure. */
5495 char src_in_struct;
5496 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
5497 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
5498 char src_volatile;
5499 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT. */
5500 enum machine_mode mode;
5501 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5502 rtx src_const;
5503 /* Hash code of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
5504 int src_const_hash_code;
5505 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5506 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
5507};
5508
5509static void
5510cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
5511 rtx insn;
5512 int in_libcall_block;
5513{
5514 register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
5515 rtx tem;
5516 register int i;
5517 register int n_sets = 0;
5518
5519 /* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
5520 rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
5521 enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
5522 struct write_data writes_memory;
5523 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
5524
5525 rtx src_eqv = 0;
5526 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
5527 int src_eqv_volatile;
5528 int src_eqv_in_memory;
5529 int src_eqv_in_struct;
5530 int src_eqv_hash_code;
5531
5532 struct set *sets;
5533
5534 this_insn = insn;
5535 writes_memory = init;
5536
5537 /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
5538 Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
5539 Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
5540 all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
5541
5542 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
5543 {
5544 sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
5545 sets[0].rtl = x;
5546
5547 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
5548 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
5549 The reason is not efficiency but rather
5550 so that we can test at the end for instructions
5551 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
5552 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
5553 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
5554 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
5555 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
5556 ;
5557
5558 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
5559 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
5560 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
5561 Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
5562 other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg. */
5563
5564 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
5565 {
5566 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
77fa0940 5567 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5568 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5569 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
5570 }
5571 else
5572 n_sets = 1;
5573 }
5574 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5575 {
5576 register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
5577
5578 sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
5579
5580 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
5581 and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
5582 elsewhere in this insn.
5583 When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
5584 we should presume that that is for a reason,
5585 and we should not substitute some other register
5586 which is not supposed to be clobbered.
5587 Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
830a38ee 5588 because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
7afe21cc
RK
5589 value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
5590 anything in that case. */
5591 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5592 {
5593 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
830a38ee
RS
5594 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER
5595 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5596 || GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == SUBREG))
7afe21cc
RK
5597 invalidate (XEXP (y, 0));
5598 }
5599
5600 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5601 {
5602 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5603 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
5604 {
5605 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns. */
5606 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
5607 {
5608 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
77fa0940 5609 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5610 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5611 invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
5612 }
5613 else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
5614 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
5615 ;
5616 else
5617 sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
5618 }
5619 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
5620 {
5621 /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
5622 and canon the address.
5623 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
5624 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
5625 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
5626 {
906c4e36 5627 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
5628 note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
5629 }
5630 }
5631 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
5632 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5633 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
906c4e36 5634 canon_reg (y, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
5635 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
5636 {
5637 canon_reg (y, insn);
77fa0940 5638 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5639 fold_rtx (y, insn);
5640 }
5641 }
5642 }
5643 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
5644 {
5645 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
5646 {
906c4e36 5647 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
5648 note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
5649 }
5650 }
5651
5652 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
5653 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
5654 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
5655 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
906c4e36 5656 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
5657 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
5658 {
5659 canon_reg (x, insn);
77fa0940 5660 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5661 fold_rtx (x, insn);
5662 }
5663
5664 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0)
5665 {
5666 /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different. */
906c4e36 5667 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
5668
5669 if (tem && ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
906c4e36 5670 src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
5671 }
5672
5673 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
5674 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
5675 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
5676 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
5677 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
5678 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
7afe21cc
RK
5679
5680 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
77fa0940 5681 but we don't do this any more. */
7afe21cc
RK
5682
5683 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5684 {
5685 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5686 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5687 rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
5688
77fa0940
RK
5689 if ((GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
5690 && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5691 != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
5692 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)
5693 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
5694 else
5695 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
5696
5697 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5698 {
5699 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
77fa0940 5700 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
7afe21cc 5701 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
77fa0940 5702 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
7afe21cc
RK
5703 }
5704
5705 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5706 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5707 || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5708 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
5709
5710 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
5711 canon_reg (dest, insn);
5712 }
5713
77fa0940
RK
5714 /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
5715 group and see if they all work. Note that this will cause some
5716 canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
5717 because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
5718 occur often. */
5719
5720 apply_change_group ();
5721
7afe21cc
RK
5722 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
5723 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
5724 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
5725 in the rest of this function.
5726
5727 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
5728
5729 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5730 {
5731 register rtx src, dest;
5732 register rtx src_folded;
5733 register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
5734 enum machine_mode mode;
5735 rtx src_eqv_here;
5736 rtx src_const = 0;
5737 rtx src_related = 0;
5738 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
5739 int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5740 int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
5741 /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
5742 contents of src_folded before using it. */
5743 int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
5744
5745 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5746 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5747
5748 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
5749 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
5750 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
5751
5752 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
5753 sets[i].mode = mode;
5754
5755 if (src_eqv)
5756 {
5757 enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
5758 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5759 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
5760 do_not_record = 0;
5761 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5762 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5763 src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
5764 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
5765
5766 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
5767
5768 if (!do_not_record)
5769 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
5770
5771 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
5772 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5773 src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5774 }
5775
5776 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
5777 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
5778 a legal substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
5779 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5780 src_eqv_here = 0;
5781 else
5782 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
5783
5784 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
5785 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
5786 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
5787
5788 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
5789 so we will be able to record it later. */
5790 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5791 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5792 {
5793 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5794
5795 if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
5796 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
906c4e36
RK
5797 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
5798 && (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
5799 src_folded
5800 = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
5801 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
7afe21cc
RK
5802 }
5803
5804 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
5805 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
5806 prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
5807 do_not_record = 0;
5808 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5809 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5810
5811 sets[i].src = src;
5812 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
5813 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5814 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5815 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5816
0dadecf6
RK
5817#if 0
5818 /* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
5819 appear to still be needed. So let's try without it since this
5820 code hurts cse'ing widened ops. */
7afe21cc
RK
5821 /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
5822 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
5823 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
5824 in general. */
5825 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5826 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
5827 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
5828 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
0dadecf6 5829#endif
7afe21cc
RK
5830
5831 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
5832 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
5833
5834 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
5835 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
5836 to a constant.
5837
5838 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
5839 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
5840 the same class; we check for this).
5841
5842 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
5843
5844 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
5845 REG_NOTE. */
5846
5847 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
5848 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
5849
5850 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
5851
5852 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
5853 {
5854 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
5855 {
5856 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
5857 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
5858 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
5859 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
5860 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, elt->mode);
5861 }
5862
5863 src_eqv_here = 0;
5864 }
5865
5866 else if (src_eqv_elt)
5867 elt = src_eqv_elt;
5868
5869 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
5870 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
5871 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
5872 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash_code'). */
5873 if (elt)
5874 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5875 if (p->is_const)
5876 {
5877 src_const = p->exp;
5878 src_const_elt = elt;
5879 break;
5880 }
5881
5882 if (src_const == 0
5883 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
5884 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
5885 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
5886 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
5887 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
5888 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
5889 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
5890 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
5891 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
5892 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5893
5894 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
5895 hash code and look it up. */
5896 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
5897 {
5898 sets[i].src_const_hash_code = HASH (src_const, mode);
5899 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash_code,
5900 mode);
5901 }
5902
5903 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
5904 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
5905
5906 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
5907 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
5908 isn't, set ELT to it. */
5909 if (src_const_elt && elt
5910 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
5911 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
5912 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
5913 elt = src_const_elt;
5914
5915 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
5916 equivalent of SRC. */
5917 if (src_const
5918 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
5919 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
5920 {
5921 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
5922 if (src_related)
5923 {
5924 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
5925 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
5926 if (src_related_elt && elt)
5927 {
5928 if (elt->first_same_value
5929 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
5930 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
5931 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
5932 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
5933 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
5934
5935 src_related = 0;
5936 src_related_elt = 0;
5937 }
5938 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
5939 elt = src_related_elt;
5940 }
5941 }
5942
e4600702
RK
5943 /* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
5944 wider mode. */
5945
5946 if (src_const && src_related == 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
5947 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5948 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
5949 {
5950 enum machine_mode wider_mode;
5951
5952 for (wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
5953 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD
5954 && src_related == 0;
5955 wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode))
5956 {
5957 struct table_elt *const_elt
5958 = lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
5959
5960 if (const_elt == 0)
5961 continue;
5962
5963 for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
5964 const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
5965 if (GET_CODE (const_elt->exp) == REG)
5966 {
5967 src_related = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode,
5968 const_elt->exp);
5969 break;
5970 }
5971 }
5972 }
5973
d45cf215
RS
5974 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
5975 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
5976 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
5977 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
5978 value. */
5979
5980 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
5981 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
5982 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
5983 {
5984 enum machine_mode tmode;
906c4e36 5985 rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
d45cf215
RS
5986
5987 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
5988 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
5989 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
5990 {
5991 rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
5992 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
5993
5994 if (inner)
5995 {
5996 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
5997 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
5998 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
5999 if (larger_elt == 0)
6000 continue;
6001
6002 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
6003 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
6004 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
6005 {
6006 src_related
6007 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
6008 break;
6009 }
6010
6011 if (src_related)
6012 break;
6013 }
6014 }
6015 }
6016
7afe21cc
RK
6017 if (src == src_folded)
6018 src_folded = 0;
6019
6020 /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
6021 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
6022 and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
6023 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
6024 already in the equivalence class.
6025
6026 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
6027 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
6028 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
6029 `src_related'. */
6030
6031 if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
6032 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
6033 {
6034 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
6035
6036 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
6037 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
6038 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
6039 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
6040 continue;
6041
6042 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
6043 src = 0;
6044 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
6045 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
6046 src_folded = 0;
6047 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
6048 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
6049 src_eqv_here = 0;
6050 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
6051 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
6052 src_related = 0;
6053
6054 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
6055 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
6056 then give it a negative cost. */
6057 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
6058 src_related = dest;
6059
6060 }
6061
6062 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
6063 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
6064 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
6065 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
05c33dd8 6066 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
7afe21cc
RK
6067 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
6068 if (src)
6069 {
6070 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
6071 src_cost = -1;
6072 else
6073 src_cost = COST (src);
6074 }
6075
6076 if (src_eqv_here)
6077 {
6078 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
6079 src_eqv_cost = -1;
6080 else
6081 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
6082 }
6083
6084 if (src_folded)
6085 {
6086 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
6087 src_folded_cost = -1;
6088 else
6089 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
6090 }
6091
6092 if (src_related)
6093 {
6094 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
6095 src_related_cost = -1;
6096 else
6097 src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
6098 }
6099
6100 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
6101 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
6102 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
6103 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
6104
6105 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
6106 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
6107 while (1)
6108 {
6109 rtx trial;
6110
6111 /* Skip invalid entries. */
6112 while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6113 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6114 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6115
6116 if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
6117
6118 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
6119 of equal cost, use this order:
6120 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
6121 if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
6122 && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6123 && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
6124 && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6125 {
6126 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
6127 if (src_folded_force_flag)
6128 trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
6129 }
6130 else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6131 && src_cost <= src_related_cost
6132 && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6133 trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
6134 else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
6135 && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6136 trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = 10000;
6137 else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6138 trial = src_related, src_related_cost = 10000;
6139 else
6140 {
05c33dd8 6141 trial = copy_rtx (elt->exp);
7afe21cc
RK
6142 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6143 src_elt_cost = 10000;
6144 }
6145
6146 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
6147 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
6148 insn below.
6149
6150 Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
6151 the operand with the constant won't match. This is simply an
6152 unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid. Just
6153 insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
6154 the insn later. */
6155
6156 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
6157 && (trial == pc_rtx
6158 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
6159 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
6160 {
6161 /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
6162 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
6163 insns work), so we must branch around the table. */
6164 if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
6165 && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
6166 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
6167 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
6168 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
6169
6170 trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
6171
6172 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
6173 break;
6174 }
6175
6176 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
6177 else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
05c33dd8
RK
6178 {
6179 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
6180 break;
6181 }
7afe21cc
RK
6182
6183 /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
6184 constants and this is a constant, try making a
6185 pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
6186 this since that is where it likely came from. */
6187
6188 else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
6189 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
6190 && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
6191 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
6192 {
6193 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
6194 src_folded = trial;
6195 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
6196 }
6197 }
6198
6199 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6200
6201 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
6202 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
6203 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
6204 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
6205 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
6206 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
6207 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6208 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6209 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
6210 && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
6211 && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
6212 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
6213 SET_SRC. */
6214 && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
6215 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
6216 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
6217 SRC is a hard register. */
6218 {
6219 int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
6220
6221 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
6222 = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
6223 : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
6224
6225 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
6226 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
6227 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
6228 if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
6229 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
6230 src = src_const;
6231 }
6232
6233 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
6234 if (src != sets[i].src)
6235 {
6236 do_not_record = 0;
6237 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6238 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6239 sets[i].src = src;
6240 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6241 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6242 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6243 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6244 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6245 }
6246
6247 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
6248 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
6249 to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
d45cf215 6250 that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
7afe21cc
RK
6251 won't help anything. */
6252 if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6253 && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
6254 {
906c4e36 6255 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6256
6257 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
6258 a new one if one does not already exist. */
6259 if (tem)
6260 XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
6261 else
6262 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
6263 src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
6264
6265 /* If storing a constant value in a register that
6266 previously held the constant value 0,
6267 record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
6268
6269 Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
6270 not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
6271 insn that set that register to zero.
6272
6273 Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
6274 the last set for this quantity was for this register. */
6275
6276 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6277 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
6278 {
6279 /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note. */
906c4e36 6280 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6281 rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
6282
6283 if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
6284 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
6285 {
6286 if (note)
6287 XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
6288 else
6289 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
6290 const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
6291 }
6292 }
6293 }
6294
6295 /* Now deal with the destination. */
6296 do_not_record = 0;
6297 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6298
6299 /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
6300 to the MEM or REG within it. */
6301 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6302 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6303 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6304 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6305 {
6306 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
6307 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6308 }
6309
6310 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
6311
6312 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6313 {
6314 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
6315
6316 /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
6317 or just things at non-fixed places.
6318 Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
6319 because we don't know how long it is. */
6320 note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
6321 }
6322
6323 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
6324 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
6325 since the register values used in the address computation
6326 are those before this instruction. */
6327 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, mode);
6328
6329 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
6330 because the value in it after the store
6331 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
6332
6333 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6334 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6335 {
6336 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6337
6338 if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6339 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
906c4e36
RK
6340 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
6341 && ! (INTVAL (src_const)
6342 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
7afe21cc
RK
6343 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
6344 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
6345 ;
6346 else
6347 {
6348 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
6349 but no new value will be recorded.
6350 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
6351 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
6352 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
6353 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6354 src_eqv = 0;
6355 src_eqv_elt = 0;
6356 }
6357 }
6358
6359 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
6360 the insn. */
6361 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
6362 {
6363 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
6364 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6365 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
6366 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6367 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
6368 --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
6369 /* No more processing for this set. */
6370 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6371 }
6372
6373 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
6374 be a conditional or computed branch. So we see if we can follow
6375 it. If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit. */
6376 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
6377 {
6378 rtx p;
6379
6380 /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
6381 we are the only SET in it, re-emit it. */
6382 if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
6383 {
6384 rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
6385 JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
6386 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
6387 delete_insn (insn);
6388 insn = new;
6389 }
6390
6391 /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
6392 there is dead code after it. Delete the dead code until we
6393 reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label. Do
6394 not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
6395 phases assume these notes are retained. */
6396
6397 p = insn;
6398
6399 while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6400 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
6401 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
6402 {
6403 if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
6404 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
6405 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6406 else
6407 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
6408 }
6409
6410 /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
6411 Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
6412 BARRIER. */
6413
6414 if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
6415 || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
6416 emit_barrier_after (insn);
6417
6418 /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes. Delete the second
6419 one if so. */
6420
538b78e7
RS
6421 if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6422 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
6423 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6424
6425 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6426 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6427 }
6428
c2a47e48
RK
6429 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
6430 processing for this assignment. */
7afe21cc
RK
6431
6432 else if (do_not_record)
c2a47e48
RK
6433 {
6434 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6435 || GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6436 invalidate (dest);
6437 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6438 }
7afe21cc
RK
6439
6440 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
6441 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
6442
6443#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6444 /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
6445 is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
6446 value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
6447 don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
6448 const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
6449 insn as a floating-point operand. */
6450 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
6451 {
6452 this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
6453 this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
6454 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
6455 this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
6456 CONST0_RTX (mode));
6457 }
6458#endif
6459 }
6460
6461 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
6462 if they are not already present.
6463 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
6464 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
6465 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
6466 (having been invalidated). */
6467
6468 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
6469 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
6470 {
6471 register struct table_elt *elt;
6472 register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
6473 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6474 enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
6475
6476 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6477 {
6478 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6479 classp = 0;
6480 }
6481 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
6482 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6483 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
6484 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
6485 elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
6486 src_eqv_elt = elt;
6487 }
6488
6489 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6490 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
6491 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
6492 {
6493 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6494 {
6495 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
6496 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
6497 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
6498 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
6499 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
6500 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6501 sets[i].src_hash_code = src_eqv_hash_code;
6502 }
6503 else
6504 {
6505 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
6506 already present. */
6507 register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
6508 register rtx src = sets[i].src;
6509 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6510 enum machine_mode mode
6511 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6512
6513 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6514 {
6515 register struct table_elt *elt;
6516
6517 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
6518 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
6519 match if not still valid. */
6520 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
6521 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6522 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6523 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
6524 elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
6525 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
6526 }
6527
6528 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
6529 && src != sets[i].src_const
6530 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
6531 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
6532 sets[i].src_const_hash_code, mode);
6533 }
6534 }
6535 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6536 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
6537 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
6538 so that the destination goes into that class. */
6539 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6540
6541 invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
77fa0940
RK
6542
6543 /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls. Memory is
6544 invalidated by non-constant calls. */
6545
7afe21cc
RK
6546 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6547 {
6548 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
77fa0940
RK
6549
6550 if (! CONST_CALL_P (insn))
6551 invalidate_memory (&everything);
7afe21cc
RK
6552 invalidate_for_call ();
6553 }
6554
6555 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
6556 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
6557 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
6558 a part of which is being set. */
6559
6560 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6561 if (sets[i].rtl)
6562 {
6563 register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
6564
6565 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
6566 previous quantity's chain.
6567 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
6568 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
6569 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6570 || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6571 invalidate (dest);
6572 }
6573
6574 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
6575 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
6576 This removes from the hash table
6577 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
6578
6579 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
6580 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
6581
6582 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6583 if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
6584 mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6585
6586 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
6587 So replace each one with the current head of the same class. */
6588
6589 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6590 if (sets[i].rtl)
6591 {
6592 if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
6593 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
6594 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
6595 {
6596 register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
6597
6598 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
6599 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
6600
6601 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
6602 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6603 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
6604 }
6605 }
6606
6607 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
6608
6609 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6610 if (sets[i].rtl)
6611 {
6612 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6613 register struct table_elt *elt;
6614
6615 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
6616 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
6617 memory. */
6618 if ((flag_float_store
6619 && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6620 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (dest)) == MODE_FLOAT)
6621 /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
6622 since we might delete the libcall. Things should have been set
6623 up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
6624 here. */
6625 || in_libcall_block
6626 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
6627 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
6628 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6629 continue;
6630
6631 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
6632 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
6633 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
6634 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6635 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
6636
c610adec 6637 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
7afe21cc
RK
6638 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
6639 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
6640 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
6641 recalculated. */
6642 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
6643
6644 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
6645 sets[i].dest_hash_code, GET_MODE (dest));
6646 elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
6647 if (elt->in_memory)
6648 {
6649 /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
6650 need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
6651 But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P. */
6652 elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
6653 || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6654 }
6655
fc3ffe83
RK
6656 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
6657 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
6658 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
6659 make that equivalence as well.
7afe21cc
RK
6660
6661 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
6662 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
6663 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
6664 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
6665 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
6666 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
6667
6668 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
6669 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
6670
6671 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
fc3ffe83
RK
6672 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) / UNITS_PER_WORD
6673 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7afe21cc
RK
6674 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
6675 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
6676 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
6677 {
6678 enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
6679 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
6680
6681 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
6682 elt = elt->next_same_value)
6683 {
6684 rtx new_src = 0;
6685 int src_hash;
6686 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6687
6688 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
6689 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6690 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6691 continue;
6692
6693 new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
6694 if (new_src == 0)
6695 new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
6696
6697 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6698 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
6699
6700 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
6701 already. */
6702 if (src_elt == 0)
6703 {
6704 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
6705 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6706 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
6707 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
6708 src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
6709 }
6710 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
6711 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
6712 actually the same. */
6713 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
6714
6715 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
6716 }
6717 }
6718 }
6719
6720 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
6721 where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
6722 After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel,
6723 so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
6724 replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
6725 Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
6726 for later optimizations.
6727
6728 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
6729 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
6730 into a three-operand insn.
6731
6732 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
6733
6734 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6735 && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
6736 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6737 && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6738 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
6739 && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
6740 == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
6741 {
6742 rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
6743 while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
6744 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
6745
6746 if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
6747 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
6748 {
6749 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
906c4e36 6750 rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6751
6752 validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
6753 validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
6754 SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
6755 validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
6756 apply_change_group ();
6757
6758 /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not. */
6759 if (note)
6760 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
6761
6762 /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it. Move
6763 any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV. */
906c4e36 6764 note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6765 if (note)
6766 remove_note (prev, note);
6767
906c4e36 6768 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6769 if (note)
6770 {
6771 remove_note (insn, note);
6772 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
6773 REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
6774 }
6775 }
6776 }
6777
6778 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
6779 the condition being tested. */
6780
6781 last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
6782 if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
6783 && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
6784 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
6785 record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
6786
6787#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6788 /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
6789 delete the previous insn. Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
6790 to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass. */
6791 if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
6792 && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
6793 && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
6794 && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
6795 {
6796 PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
6797 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6798 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
6799 }
6800
6801 prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
6802 prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
6803#endif
6804
6805 prev_insn = insn;
6806}
6807\f
6808/* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
6809 that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
6810 If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated. */
6811
6812static void
6813note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
6814 rtx written;
6815 struct write_data *writes_ptr;
6816{
6817 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6818
6819 if (written == 0)
6820 *writes_ptr = everything;
6821 else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
6822 {
6823 /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
6824 rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
6825 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
6826 || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
6827 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
6828 && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
6829 {
6830 writes_ptr->sp = 1;
6831 return;
6832 }
6833 else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
6834 *writes_ptr = everything;
6835 else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
6836 {
6837 /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
6838 and that's just as good as a structure element
6839 in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables. */
6840 if (!(MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
6841 || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS))
6842 writes_ptr->all = 1;
6843 writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
6844 }
6845 writes_ptr->var = 1;
6846 }
6847}
6848
6849/* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
6850 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
6851 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6852 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
6853
6854 W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
6855 saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
6856 X is the pattern of the insn. */
6857
6858static void
6859invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
6860 struct write_data *w;
6861 rtx x;
6862{
6863 /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
6864 If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
6865 so they can be ignored in the rest of this function. */
6866 if (w->var)
6867 invalidate_memory (w);
6868
6869 if (w->sp)
6870 {
6871 if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
6872 reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
6873
6874 /* This should be *very* rare. */
6875 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
6876 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
6877 }
6878
6879 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6880 {
6881 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
6882 if (ref
6883 && (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6884 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all)))
6885 invalidate (ref);
6886 }
6887 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6888 {
6889 register int i;
6890 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6891 {
6892 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6893 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6894 {
6895 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
6896 if (ref
6897 &&(GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6898 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all)))
6899 invalidate (ref);
6900 }
6901 }
6902 }
6903}
6904\f
6905/* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
6906 and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
6907 or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
6908 only do this if the address remains valid.
6909
6910 OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
6911
6912 Return the replacement for X. */
6913
6914static rtx
6915cse_process_notes (x, object)
6916 rtx x;
6917 rtx object;
6918{
6919 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
6920 char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6921 int qty;
6922 int i;
6923
6924 switch (code)
6925 {
6926 case CONST_INT:
6927 case CONST:
6928 case SYMBOL_REF:
6929 case LABEL_REF:
6930 case CONST_DOUBLE:
6931 case PC:
6932 case CC0:
6933 case LO_SUM:
6934 return x;
6935
6936 case MEM:
6937 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
6938 return x;
6939
6940 case EXPR_LIST:
6941 case INSN_LIST:
6942 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
906c4e36 6943 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc 6944 if (XEXP (x, 1))
906c4e36 6945 XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6946 return x;
6947
e4890d45
RS
6948 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6949 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6950 {
6951 rtx new = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object);
6952 /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
6953 since they would impede folding. */
6954 if (GET_MODE (new) != VOIDmode)
6955 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new, 0);
6956 return x;
6957 }
6958
7afe21cc
RK
6959 case REG:
6960 i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
6961
6962 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
6963 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
6964 && qty_const[i] != 0
6965 && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
6966 || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
6967 {
6968 rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
6969 if (new)
6970 return new;
6971 }
6972
6973 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
906c4e36 6974 return canon_reg (x, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6975 }
6976
6977 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
6978 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6979 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
906c4e36 6980 cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6981
6982 return x;
6983}
6984\f
6985/* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
6986 of the loop. LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
6987
6988 Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
6989 in the body of the loop. For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
6990 Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
6991 however, we don't detect that common subexpression. This will be caught
6992 when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
6993
6994 This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
6995 It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
6996 NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
6997 jumps to a label used only once. */
6998
6999static void
7000cse_around_loop (loop_start)
7001 rtx loop_start;
7002{
7003 rtx insn;
7004 int i;
7005 struct table_elt *p;
7006
7007 /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
7008 do anything. */
7009 for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
7010 insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
7011 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7012 ;
7013
7014 if (insn == 0
7015 || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7016 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
7017 return;
7018
7019 /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
7020 we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
f72aed24 7021 the loop. Any equivalences resulting from that comparison are
7afe21cc
RK
7022 therefore not valid and must be invalidated. */
7023 if (last_jump_equiv_class)
7024 for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
7025 p = p->next_same_value)
7026 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
7027 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
7028 invalidate (p->exp);
7029
7030 /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
7031 a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
7032
7033 The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
7034 can safely process each SET in order. It is slightly less efficient
7035 to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases. */
7036
7037 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
7038 GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
7039 && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
7040 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
7041 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7042 {
7043 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7044 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
7045 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
7046 cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
7047 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7048 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7049 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7050 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
7051 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
7052 cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
7053 loop_start);
7054 }
7055}
7056\f
8b3686ed
RK
7057/* Variable used for communications between the next two routines. */
7058
7059static struct write_data skipped_writes_memory;
7060
7061/* Process one SET of an insn that was skipped. We ignore CLOBBERs
7062 since they are done elsewhere. This function is called via note_stores. */
7063
7064static void
7065invalidate_skipped_set (dest, set)
7066 rtx set;
7067 rtx dest;
7068{
7069 if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER
7070#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7071 || dest == cc0_rtx
7072#endif
7073 || dest == pc_rtx)
7074 return;
7075
7076 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
7077 note_mem_written (dest, &skipped_writes_memory);
7078
7079 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
7080 || (! skipped_writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
7081 invalidate (dest);
7082}
7083
7084/* Invalidate all insns from START up to the end of the function or the
7085 next label. This called when we wish to CSE around a block that is
7086 conditionally executed. */
7087
7088static void
7089invalidate_skipped_block (start)
7090 rtx start;
7091{
7092 rtx insn;
7093 int i;
7094 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7095 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7096
7097 for (insn = start; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL;
7098 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7099 {
7100 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) != 'i')
7101 continue;
7102
7103 skipped_writes_memory = init;
7104
7105 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
7106 {
7107 invalidate_for_call ();
7108 skipped_writes_memory = everything;
7109 }
7110
7111 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), invalidate_skipped_set);
7112 invalidate_from_clobbers (&skipped_writes_memory, PATTERN (insn));
7113 }
7114}
7115\f
7afe21cc
RK
7116/* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
7117 value to be checked for modification. */
7118
7119static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
7120
7121/* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
7122 indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0. */
7123
7124static void
7125cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
7126 rtx x;
7127 rtx set;
7128{
7129 if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
7130 || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
7131 return;
7132
7133 if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
7134 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
7135 cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
7136}
7137
7138/* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
7139 a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
7140
7141 If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
7142 If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
7143 loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
7144
7145 If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
7146 the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
7147 retains its value at the start of the loop.
7148
7149 If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
7150 load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
7151 register.
7152
7153 In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies. */
7154
7155static void
7156cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
7157 rtx x;
7158 rtx insn;
7159 rtx loop_start;
7160{
7161 rtx p;
7162 struct table_elt *src_elt;
7163 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7164 struct write_data writes_memory;
7165
7166 writes_memory = init;
7167
7168 /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
7169 are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register. */
7170 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
7171 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
7172 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
7173 {
7174 src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
7175 HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
7176 GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
7177
7178 if (src_elt)
7179 for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
7180 src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
7181 if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
7182 && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
7183 {
7184 rtx p, set;
7185
7186 /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
7187 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
7188 a label or CALL_INSN. */
7189
7190 for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
7191 p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
7192 && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
7193 p = prev_nonnote_insn (p))
7194 if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
7195 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
7196 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
7197 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
7198 {
7199 /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
7200 and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
7201 SET_SRC (x). We know that nothing within the loop
7202 can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
7203 the hash table. */
7204 rtx q;
7205
7206 cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
7207 for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
7208 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
7209 note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
7210
7211 /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
7212 SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
7213 to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with. */
7214 if (cse_check_loop_start_value
7215 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
7216 src_elt->exp, 0))
7217 emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
7218 SET_DEST (set)),
7219 p);
7220 break;
7221 }
7222 }
7223 }
7224
7225 /* Now invalidate anything modified by X. */
7226 note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
7227
7228 if (writes_memory.var)
7229 invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
7230
7231 /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
7232 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7233 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
7234 && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
7235 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
7236}
7237\f
7238/* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
7239 the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
7240 block, and the branch path.
7241
7242 The branch path indicates which branches should be followed. If a non-zero
7243 path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
7244 of branches will be taken. The branch path is only used if
8b3686ed 7245 FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS or FLAG_CSE_SKIP_BLOCKS is non-zero.
7afe21cc
RK
7246
7247 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
7248 used to describe the block. It is filled in with the information about
7249 the current block. The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
7250 to construct the output branch path. */
7251
7252/* Define maximum length of a branch path. */
7253
7254#define PATHLENGTH 20
7255
7256struct cse_basic_block_data {
7257 /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block. */
7258 int low_cuid;
7259 /* Highest CUID value of insns in block. */
7260 int high_cuid;
7261 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
7262 int nsets;
7263 /* Last insn in the block. */
7264 rtx last;
7265 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
7266 int path_size;
7267 /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken. */
7268 struct branch_path {
7269 /* The branch insn. */
7270 rtx branch;
8b3686ed
RK
7271 /* Whether it should be taken or not. AROUND is the same as taken
7272 except that it is used when the destination label is not preceded
7273 by a BARRIER. */
7274 enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN, AROUND} status;
7afe21cc
RK
7275 } path[PATHLENGTH];
7276};
7277
7278void
8b3686ed 7279cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop, skip_blocks)
7afe21cc
RK
7280 rtx insn;
7281 struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
7282 int follow_jumps;
7283 int after_loop;
8b3686ed 7284 int skip_blocks;
7afe21cc
RK
7285{
7286 rtx p = insn, q;
7287 int nsets = 0;
7288 int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
fc3ffe83 7289 rtx next = GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' ? insn : next_real_insn (insn);
7afe21cc
RK
7290 int path_size = data->path_size;
7291 int path_entry = 0;
7292 int i;
7293
7294 /* Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
7295 previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN. If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
7296 shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch. We know that
7297 at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero. */
7298 while (path_size > 0)
7299 {
8b3686ed 7300 if (data->path[path_size - 1].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7301 {
7302 data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
7303 break;
7304 }
7305 else
7306 path_size--;
7307 }
7308
7309 /* Scan to end of this basic block. */
7310 while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
7311 {
7312 /* Don't cse out the end of a loop. This makes a difference
7313 only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
7314 all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
7315 Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
7316 might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
7317 to be reused after the end of the loop. This would make it
7318 hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
7319 especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
7320 and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
7321
7322 If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
7323 the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END. */
7324
7325 if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7326 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
7327 break;
7328
7329 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
7330 the regs restored by the longjmp come from
7331 a later time than the setjmp. */
7332 if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7333 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7334 break;
7335
7336 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
7337 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
7338 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
7339 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
7340 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
7341 else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
7342 nsets += 1;
7343
7344 if (INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
8b3686ed 7345 high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7afe21cc 7346 if (INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
8b3686ed 7347 low_cuid = INSN_CUID(p);
7afe21cc
RK
7348
7349 /* See if this insn is in our branch path. If it is and we are to
7350 take it, do so. */
7351 if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
7352 {
8b3686ed 7353 if (data->path[path_entry].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7354 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7355
7356 /* Point to next entry in path, if any. */
7357 path_entry++;
7358 }
7359
7360 /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
7361 was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
7362 insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
8b3686ed
RK
7363 jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.
7364
7365 Alternatively, we can follow the jump if it branches around a
7366 block of code and there are no other branches into the block.
7367 In this case invalidate_skipped_block will be called to invalidate any
7368 registers set in the block when following the jump. */
7369
7370 else if ((follow_jumps || skip_blocks) && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
7afe21cc
RK
7371 && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
7372 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
7373 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7374 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
7375 && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
7376 {
7377 for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
7378 if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
7379 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7380 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7381 && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
7382 break;
7383
7384 /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
7385 basic block when the branch is taken. */
8b3686ed 7386 if (follow_jumps && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
7387 {
7388 /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
7389 always-executed loop. */
fc3ffe83
RK
7390 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7391 {
7392 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7393 continue;
7394 }
7afe21cc
RK
7395
7396 /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once. */
7397 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7398 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7399 break;
7400
7401 if (i != path_entry)
7402 break;
7403
7404 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7405 data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
7406
7407 /* This branch now ends our path. It was possible that we
7408 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
7409 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
7410 turned into a no-op). */
7411 path_size = path_entry;
7412
7413 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7414 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7415 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7416 }
8b3686ed
RK
7417 /* Detect a branch around a block of code. */
7418 else if (skip_blocks && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL)
7419 {
7420 register rtx tmp;
7421
fc3ffe83
RK
7422 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7423 {
7424 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7425 continue;
7426 }
8b3686ed
RK
7427
7428 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7429 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7430 break;
7431
7432 if (i != path_entry)
7433 break;
7434
7435 /* This is no_labels_between_p (p, q) with an added check for
7436 reaching the end of a function (in case Q precedes P). */
7437 for (tmp = NEXT_INSN (p); tmp && tmp != q; tmp = NEXT_INSN (tmp))
7438 if (GET_CODE (tmp) == CODE_LABEL)
7439 break;
7440
7441 if (tmp == q)
7442 {
7443 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7444 data->path[path_entry++].status = AROUND;
7445
7446 path_size = path_entry;
7447
7448 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7449 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7450 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7451 }
7452 }
7afe21cc 7453 }
7afe21cc
RK
7454 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7455 }
7456
7457 data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
7458 data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
7459 data->nsets = nsets;
7460 data->last = p;
7461
7462 /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
7463 so a rescan won't be done. */
7464 for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8b3686ed 7465 if (data->path[i].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7466 break;
7467
7468 if (i == -1)
7469 data->path_size = 0;
7470 else
7471 data->path_size = path_size;
7472
7473 /* End the current branch path. */
7474 data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
7475}
7476\f
7477static rtx cse_basic_block ();
7478
7479/* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
7480 F is the first instruction.
7481 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
7482
7483 AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
7484 (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
7485
7486 Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
7487 in conditional jump instructions. */
7488
7489int
7490cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
7491 rtx f;
7492 int nregs;
7493 int after_loop;
7494 FILE *file;
7495{
7496 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7497 register rtx insn = f;
7498 register int i;
7499
7500 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7501 constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
7502 val.path_size = 0;
7503
7504 init_recog ();
7505
7506 max_reg = nregs;
7507
7508 all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7509 consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7510
7511 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
7512 {
7513 all_minus_one[i] = -1;
7514 consec_ints[i] = i;
7515 }
7516
7517 reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7518 reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7519 reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7520 reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7521 reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7522
7523 /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
7524 since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack. */
7525 bzero (table, sizeof table);
7526 free_element_chain = 0;
7527 n_elements_made = 0;
7528
7529 /* Find the largest uid. */
7530
7531 i = get_max_uid ();
906c4e36
RK
7532 uid_cuid = (int *) alloca ((i + 1) * sizeof (int));
7533 bzero (uid_cuid, (i + 1) * sizeof (int));
7afe21cc
RK
7534
7535 /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
7536 CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
7537 except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
7538 Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
7539 between two insns is not affected by -g. */
7540
7541 for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7542 {
7543 if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7544 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
7545 INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
7546 else
7547 /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn. */
7548 INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
7549 }
7550
7551 /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls. */
7552
7553 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
7554
7555 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
7556 if ((call_used_regs[i]
7557 /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
7558 fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
7559 confused if they can "live across calls".
7560
7561 The frame pointer is always preserved across calls. The arg
7562 pointer is if it is fixed. The stack pointer usually is, unless
7563 RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
7564 will be present. If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
7565 table register is preserved across calls. */
7566
7567 && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
7568 && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7569#if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7570 && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
7571#endif
7572#ifdef PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
7573 && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
7574#endif
7575 )
7576 || global_regs[i])
7577 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
7578
7579 /* Loop over basic blocks.
7580 Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
7581 (which is 2 for each SET). */
7582 insn = f;
7583 while (insn)
7584 {
8b3686ed
RK
7585 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop,
7586 flag_cse_skip_blocks);
7afe21cc
RK
7587
7588 /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it. */
7589 if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7590 {
7591 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7592 insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
7593 val.path_size = 0;
7594 continue;
7595 }
7596
7597 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7598 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7599 max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
7600
7601 if (file)
7602 fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
7603 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
7604 val.nsets);
7605
7606 /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
7607 past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful. */
7608 if (max_qty < 500)
7609 max_qty = 500;
7610
7611 max_qty += max_reg;
7612
7613 /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
7614 (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
7615 Otherwise, we start after this basic block. */
7616 if (val.path_size > 0)
7617 cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
7618 else
7619 {
7620 int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
7621 rtx temp;
7622
7623 /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
7624 jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
7625 us a new branch path to investigate. */
7626 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7627 temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
8b3686ed
RK
7628 if (cse_jumps_altered == 0
7629 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
7630 insn = temp;
7631
7632 cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
7633 }
7634
7635#ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
7636 alloca (0);
7637#endif
7638 }
7639
7640 /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available. */
7641 qty_const = 0;
7642
7643 if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
7644 max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
7645
7646 return cse_jumps_altered;
7647}
7648
7649/* Process a single basic block. FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
7650 block. NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
7651 a null path when not following jumps.
7652
7653 AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
7654 loop. This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
7655 block and this CSE pass is before loop.c. */
7656
7657static rtx
7658cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
7659 register rtx from, to;
7660 struct branch_path *next_branch;
7661 int around_loop;
7662{
7663 register rtx insn;
7664 int to_usage = 0;
7665 int in_libcall_block = 0;
7666
7667 /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
7668 the space actually needed and adjust the start below. */
7669
7670 qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7671 qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7672 qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
7673 qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7674 qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7675 qty_comparison_code
7676 = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
7677 qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7678 qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7679
7680 qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
7681 qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
7682 qty_mode -= max_reg;
7683 qty_const -= max_reg;
7684 qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
7685 qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
7686 qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
7687 qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
7688
7689 new_basic_block ();
7690
7691 /* TO might be a label. If so, protect it from being deleted. */
7692 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7693 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7694
7695 for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7696 {
7697 register enum rtx_code code;
7698
7699 /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path. If so, and it is
7700 to be taken, do so. */
7701 if (next_branch->branch == insn)
7702 {
8b3686ed
RK
7703 enum taken status = next_branch++->status;
7704 if (status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc 7705 {
8b3686ed
RK
7706 if (status == TAKEN)
7707 record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
7708 else
7709 invalidate_skipped_block (NEXT_INSN (insn));
7710
7afe21cc
RK
7711 /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
7712 Then follow this branch. */
7713#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7714 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
7715#endif
7716 prev_insn = insn;
7717 insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
7718 continue;
7719 }
7720 }
7721
7722 code = GET_CODE (insn);
7723 if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7724 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7725
7726 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
7727 {
7728 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
7729 looking for duplicate operations. */
7730
7731 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
906c4e36 7732 REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
7733
7734 /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block. Inside such a block,
7735 we do not want to record destinations. The last insn of a
7736 LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
830a38ee 7737 its destination is the result of the block and hence should be
7afe21cc
RK
7738 recorded. */
7739
906c4e36 7740 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
7afe21cc 7741 in_libcall_block = 1;
906c4e36 7742 else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
7afe21cc
RK
7743 in_libcall_block = 0;
7744
7745 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
7746 }
7747
7748 /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
7749 basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
7750 basic block. If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
7751 that we can have one usage of TO. */
7752
7753 if (simplejump_p (insn))
7754 {
7755 if (to == 0)
7756 return 0;
7757
7758 if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
7759 to_usage = 1;
7760
6a5293dc
RS
7761 /* Maybe TO was deleted because the jump is unconditional.
7762 If so, there is nothing left in this basic block. */
7763 /* ??? Perhaps it would be smarter to set TO
7764 to whatever follows this insn,
7765 and pretend the basic block had always ended here. */
7766 if (INSN_DELETED_P (to))
7767 break;
7768
7afe21cc
RK
7769 insn = PREV_INSN (to);
7770 }
7771
7772 /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
7773 which used to end our basic block. Remember that we incremented
d45cf215 7774 the count of that label, so we decrement it here. If we made
7afe21cc
RK
7775 a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
7776 want to count the use in that jump. */
7777
7778 if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
7779 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
7780 {
7781 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7782
7783 insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
7784
7785 if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
7786 delete_insn (to);
7787
7788 /* Find the end of the following block. Note that we won't be
7789 following branches in this case. If TO was the last insn
7790 in the function, we are done. Similarly, if we deleted the
d45cf215 7791 insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
7afe21cc
RK
7792 a BARRIER. In that case, we are done with this block because it
7793 has no continuation. */
7794
7795 if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
7796 return 0;
7797
7798 to_usage = 0;
7799 val.path_size = 0;
8b3686ed 7800 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0, 0);
7afe21cc
RK
7801
7802 /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
7803 to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
7804 continue through it. Otherwise, return,
7805 and that block will be scanned individually. */
7806 if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
7807 break;
7808
7809 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7810 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7811 to = val.last;
7812
7813 /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label. */
7814 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7815 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7816
7817 /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension. */
7818 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
7819 }
7820 }
7821
7822 if (next_qty > max_qty)
7823 abort ();
7824
7825 /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
7826 the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
7827 we can cse into the loop. Don't do this if we changed the jump
7828 structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps. */
7829
8b3686ed
RK
7830 if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0
7831 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
7832 && around_loop && to != 0
7833 && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7834 && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
7835 && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
7836 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
7837 cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
7838
7839 return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
7840}
7841\f
7842/* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
7843 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
7844 we count each register usage. */
7845
7846static void
7847count_reg_usage (x, counts, incr)
7848 rtx x;
7849 int *counts;
7850 int incr;
7851{
7852 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7853 char *fmt;
7854 int i, j;
7855
7856 switch (code)
7857 {
7858 case REG:
7859 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
7860 return;
7861
7862 case PC:
7863 case CC0:
7864 case CONST:
7865 case CONST_INT:
7866 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7867 case SYMBOL_REF:
7868 case LABEL_REF:
7869 case CLOBBER:
7870 return;
7871
7872 case SET:
7873 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
7874 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
7875 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, incr);
7876 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts, incr);
7877 return;
7878
7879 case INSN:
7880 case JUMP_INSN:
7881 case CALL_INSN:
7882 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, incr);
7883
7884 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
7885 use them. */
7886
7887 if (REG_NOTES (x))
7888 count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, incr);
7889 return;
7890
7891 case EXPR_LIST:
7892 case INSN_LIST:
7893 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
7894 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, incr);
7895 if (XEXP (x, 1))
7896 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, incr);
7897 return;
7898 }
7899
7900 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
7901 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7902 {
7903 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
7904 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, incr);
7905 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
7906 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
7907 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, incr);
7908 }
7909}
7910\f
7911/* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
7912 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
7913
7914 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse. It improves the
7915 heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
7916 or make givs for dead quantities. The remaining passes of the compilation
7917 are also sped up. */
7918
7919void
7920delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
7921 rtx insns;
7922 int nreg;
7923{
7924 int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
77fa0940 7925 rtx insn, prev;
d45cf215 7926 rtx tem;
7afe21cc 7927 int i;
e4890d45 7928 int in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
7929
7930 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
7931 bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
7932 for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
7933 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, 1);
7934
7935 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
7936 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
7937 usage counts for registers it uses. */
77fa0940 7938 for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ()); insn; insn = prev)
7afe21cc
RK
7939 {
7940 int live_insn = 0;
7941
77fa0940
RK
7942 prev = prev_real_insn (insn);
7943
e4890d45 7944 /* Don't delete any insns that are part of a libcall block.
77fa0940
RK
7945 Flow or loop might get confused if we did that. Remember
7946 that we are scanning backwards. */
906c4e36 7947 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
e4890d45
RS
7948 in_libcall = 1;
7949
7950 if (in_libcall)
7951 live_insn = 1;
7952 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
7afe21cc
RK
7953 {
7954 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
7955 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7956 ;
7957
d45cf215
RS
7958#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7959 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
7960 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7961 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7962 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7963 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7964 ;
7965#endif
7afe21cc
RK
7966 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
7967 || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7968 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
7969 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
7970 live_insn = 1;
7971 }
7972 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7973 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7974 {
7975 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
7976
7977 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
7978 {
7979 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
7980 && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
7981 ;
7982
d45cf215
RS
7983#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7984 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
7985 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
7986 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7987 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7988 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7989 ;
7990#endif
7afe21cc
RK
7991 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
7992 || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7993 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
7994 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
7995 live_insn = 1;
7996 }
7997 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
7998 live_insn = 1;
7999 }
8000 else
8001 live_insn = 1;
8002
8003 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
e4890d45 8004 being used. */
7afe21cc 8005
e4890d45 8006 if (! live_insn)
7afe21cc
RK
8007 {
8008 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, -1);
77fa0940 8009 delete_insn (insn);
7afe21cc 8010 }
e4890d45 8011
906c4e36 8012 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
e4890d45 8013 in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
8014 }
8015}
This page took 0.847544 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.